Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf ·...

141
026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98 Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM &20387(5 352&(66 &21752/6

Transcript of Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf ·...

Page 1: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Building Control Unit (BCU)Installation and Operation

Manual

TM

& 2 0 3 8 7 ( 5 3 5 2 & ( 6 6 & 2 1 7 5 2 / 6

Page 2: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 3: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

1640 Airport Road, Suite 104Kennesaw, GA 31044

Phone: (770) 425-2724Fax: (770) 425-9319

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.

The information contained in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate. However, Computer Process Controls, Inc. assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained herein. In no event will Computer Process Controls, Inc. be liable for any direct, indirect, special, incidental, or consequential damages resulting from any defect or omission in this manual, even if advised of the possibility of such damages. In the interest of continued product development, Com-puter Process Controls, Inc. reserves the right to make improvements to this manual, and the products described herein, at any time without notice or obligation.

THIS PRODUCT IS AN FCC CLASS A DIGITAL DEVICE.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A dig-ital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio fre-quency energy, and—if not installed and used in accordance with this instruction man-ual—may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case correction of the interference will be at the user’s expense.

TM

& 20 3 8 7 ( 5 3 5 2 & ( 6 6 & 2 1 7 5 2 / 6

Page 4: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 5: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Table of Revisions • i

Table of RevisionsRevision Description Page

REV 3.................. DEMAND MONITORING FOR UP TO FOUR POWER CIRCUITS.................................................................... 6-6

REV 3.................. OPTION TO CURTAIL FANS WITH LOAD CURTAILMENT .......................................................................... 6-7

REV 3.................. MANUALLY SPECIFIED WINTER AND SUMMER ECONOMIZATION STRATEGIES....................................... 6-8

REV 3.................. ECONOMIZATION LOCKOUT FOR MECHANICAL COOL STAGES ............................................................... 6-9

REV 3.................. NEW OPTIONS FOR MAKEUP AIR THAT CHANGES THE DAMPER OFFSET AND FANS ON........................ 6-10

REV 3.................. FILTER FOR I/O CONTROL.................................................................................................................... 6-14

REV 3.................. MINIMUM ON/OFF TIMES FOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS ........................................................................... 6-16

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-LOCKOUT TO PREVENT UNDESIREABLE AIR FROM BEING ECONOMIZED ........................ 8-9

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-SUMMER/WINTER ECONOMIZATION METHOD CONTROL ............................................... 8-9

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-OPTIONS FOR MAKEUP AIR THAT CHANGES THE DAMPER OFFSETS AND FANS ON....... 8-14

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-ABILITY TO MONITOR MULTIPLE POWER CIRCUITS FOR DEMAND................................ 8-16

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-OPTION TO CURTAIL FANS WITH LOAD CURTAILMENT ................................................. 8-18

REV 3.................. ADDED TWO ADDITIONAL ALTERNATE WEEK SCREENS.................................................................... 8-22

REV 3.................. ADDED OPTION TO USE ALTERNATE SCHEDULE................................................................................ 8-23

REV 3.................. ADDED OPTION TO LOG DIGITAL OUTPUT ......................................................................................... 8-32

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-MINIMUM ON/OFF TIMES FOR INPUTS AND OUTPUTS................................................... 8-34

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-ABILITY TO DISPLAY TEMPERATURE IN EITHER FAHRENHEIT OR CENTIGRADE........... 8-37

REV 3.................. NEW SCREEN-ALARMS FILTER ADDED TO SYSTEM SETUP .................................................................. 8-39

Page 6: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 7: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Table of Contents • iii

Table of Contents1 INTRODUCTION...................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1. BCU ......................................................................................................................................................................... 1-11.2. MANUAL ................................................................................................................................................................... 1-1

2 HARDWARE OVERVIEW...................................................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-12.2. BUILDING CONTROL UNIT (BCU) ........................................................................................................................... 2-12.3. INPUT COMMUNICATION BOARDS ............................................................................................................................ 2-2

2.3.1. 16AI Board........................................................................................................................................................ 2-22.4. OUTPUT COMMUNICATION BOARDS......................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.4.1. 8RO Board ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-32.4.2. 8RO Form C Board........................................................................................................................................... 2-3

2.5. SPECIAL PURPOSE COMMUNICATION BOARDS......................................................................................................... 2-42.5.1. 8IO Board ......................................................................................................................................................... 2-4

2.6. ADVANCED ROOFTOP CONTROLLER ........................................................................................................................ 2-42.7. 485 ALARM PANEL................................................................................................................................................... 2-52.8. HAND-HELD TERMINAL ........................................................................................................................................... 2-52.9. REMOTE COMMUNICATION....................................................................................................................................... 2-6

2.9.1. RS232 Bus Amplifier ......................................................................................................................................... 2-62.9.2. Modems ............................................................................................................................................................. 2-62.9.3. UltraSite™ ........................................................................................................................................................ 2-6

3 HARDWARE MOUNTING..................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3.1. BUILDING CONTROL UNIT........................................................................................................................................ 3-13.2. I/O BOARDS AND ENCLOSURES................................................................................................................................ 3-1

3.2.1. 8IOs/ARTCs Without Enclosures Mounting ..................................................................................................... 3-33.3. 485 ALARM PANEL................................................................................................................................................... 3-33.4. RS232 BUS AMPLIFIER............................................................................................................................................. 3-43.5. ADVANCED ROOFTOP CONTROLLER (ARTC) .......................................................................................................... 3-43.6. TEMPERATURE SENSORS .......................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.6.1. Inside Temperature Sensor ............................................................................................................................... 3-53.6.2. Outside (Ambient) Temperature Sensor............................................................................................................ 3-53.6.3. Insertion Temperature Probe............................................................................................................................ 3-53.6.4. Supply and Return Air Sensors ......................................................................................................................... 3-5

3.7. HUMIDITY SENSORS AND HUMIDISTATS .................................................................................................................. 3-63.8. DEW POINT SENSORS AND CONTROL SWITCHES ..................................................................................................... 3-6

3.8.1. Dew Cell Dew Point Probe............................................................................................................................... 3-63.8.2. Dew Point Control Switch................................................................................................................................. 3-6

3.9. LIGHT LEVEL SENSOR .............................................................................................................................................. 3-63.10. POWER MONITORS.................................................................................................................................................. 3-63.11. TRANSFORMERS...................................................................................................................................................... 3-6

4 THE REFLECS NETWORKS ................................................................................................................................. 4-1

4.1. INTRODUCTION ......................................................................................................................................................... 4-14.2. RS485 INPUT/OUTPUT (I/O) NETWORK (COM A AND D)....................................................................................... 4-14.3. RS485 HOST NETWORK (COM B)........................................................................................................................... 4-14.4. RS232 REMOTE COMMUNICATION NETWORK (COM C)......................................................................................... 4-24.5. LEGS AND SEGMENTS ............................................................................................................................................... 4-24.6. LEG AND SEGMENT WIRE LENGTH .......................................................................................................................... 4-2

Page 8: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

iv • Table of Contents 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

4.7. NUMBER OF DEVICES PER SEGMENT ........................................................................................................................ 4-24.8. DAISY CHAINS .......................................................................................................................................................... 4-24.9. STAR CONFIGURATIONS............................................................................................................................................ 4-34.10. TERMINATING RESISTANCE JUMPERS (COM A, COM B, AND COM D ONLY) .................................................... 4-34.11. NETWORK DIP SWITCHES AND ROTARY DIALS (COM A AND D ONLY) ............................................................... 4-44.12. BAUD RATE DIP SWITCHES (COM A AND D)........................................................................................................ 4-44.13. NETWORK SETTINGS............................................................................................................................................... 4-4

4.13.1. Network Addresses .......................................................................................................................................... 4-44.14. BAUD RATE SETTINGS............................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4.14.1. 8IO/ARTC........................................................................................................................................................ 4-54.14.2. COM B............................................................................................................................................................. 4-54.14.3. COM C ............................................................................................................................................................ 4-5

4.15. FAIL-SAFE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS.......................................................................................................................... 4-54.16. INPUT TYPE DIP SWITCH SETTINGS........................................................................................................................ 4-6

5 WIRING FOR NETWORK & POWER CONNECTIONS................................................................................... 5-1

5.1. WIRING SPECIFICATIONS .......................................................................................................................................... 5-15.2. COM A AND D WIRING ........................................................................................................................................... 5-15.3. COM B WIRING ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-15.4. COM C WIRING ....................................................................................................................................................... 5-25.5. SENSOR AND TRANSDUCER WIRING......................................................................................................................... 5-25.6. POWER CONNECTION WIRING .................................................................................................................................. 5-6

5.6.1. Power Requirements ......................................................................................................................................... 5-65.6.2. Power Transformers.......................................................................................................................................... 5-6

6 SOFTWARE OVERVIEW ....................................................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1. ZONE MANAGEMENT ................................................................................................................................................ 6-16.2. SCHEDULING ............................................................................................................................................................. 6-26.3. HEATING ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-26.4. COOLING ................................................................................................................................................................... 6-36.5. DEHUMIDIFICATION .................................................................................................................................................. 6-46.6. DEMAND CONTROL................................................................................................................................................... 6-5

6.6.1. Demand Monitoring .......................................................................................................................................... 6-66.6.2. Predicting Energy Consumption ....................................................................................................................... 6-66.6.3. Load Shedding................................................................................................................................................... 6-6

6.7. CURTAILMENT .......................................................................................................................................................... 6-76.8. ECONOMIZATION....................................................................................................................................................... 6-76.9. MAKEUP AIR............................................................................................................................................................. 6-9

6.9.1. OAT Disable.................................................................................................................................................... 6-106.10. INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL ..................................................................................................................................... 6-10

6.10.1. Cells and Modules......................................................................................................................................... 6-11

7 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION GUIDE ................................................................................................................... 7-1

7.1. DEFINE ZONES AND HVAC SETPOINTS.................................................................................................................... 7-17.2. DEFINE SCHEDULES .................................................................................................................................................. 7-17.3. DEFINE INPUTS ......................................................................................................................................................... 7-17.4. DEFINE OUTPUTS ...................................................................................................................................................... 7-27.5. SETUP DEMAND MONITORING.................................................................................................................................. 7-27.6. CHECK SYSTEM STATUS SCREENS ........................................................................................................................... 7-27.7. IF IT IS NECESSARY TO BYPASS A SYSTEM SETTING............................................................................................... 7-2

8 SYSTEM SETUP....................................................................................................................................................... 8-1

8.1. DEFAULT STATUS SCREENS...................................................................................................................................... 8-28.2. LOG ON..................................................................................................................................................................... 8-3

Page 9: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Table of Contents • v

8.3. MAIN MENU ............................................................................................................................................................. 8-48.4. HVAC CONTROL MENU........................................................................................................................................... 8-4

8.4.1. Zone Status ........................................................................................................................................................ 8-48.4.2. RTC Board Assignments ................................................................................................................................... 8-58.4.3. Control Methods ............................................................................................................................................... 8-58.4.4. Zone Schedule Setup ......................................................................................................................................... 8-68.4.5. Temp CTL A ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-78.4.6. RH% Inside ....................................................................................................................................................... 8-88.4.7. Miscellaneous Set Points .................................................................................................................................. 8-98.4.8. Alarm Set Points................................................................................................................................................ 8-98.4.9. Copy to Zones.................................................................................................................................................. 8-108.4.10. Shed Set Points for HVAC............................................................................................................................. 8-108.4.11. RTC Status..................................................................................................................................................... 8-108.4.12. RTC I/O Setup ............................................................................................................................................... 8-118.4.13. Analog Output Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 8-128.4.14. RTC Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-138.4.15. Supply Temp Cool Lockout ........................................................................................................................... 8-148.4.16. RTC Setup (Makeup Air)............................................................................................................................... 8-148.4.17. RTC Bypass ................................................................................................................................................... 8-15

8.5. DEMAND CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................ 8-168.5.1. Power Circuit(s) Setup.................................................................................................................................... 8-168.5.2. Demand Set Points .......................................................................................................................................... 8-168.5.3. Demand Alarm Set Points ............................................................................................................................... 8-178.5.4. Load Shed Setup.............................................................................................................................................. 8-188.5.5. HVAC RTCs Shed Setup.................................................................................................................................. 8-188.5.6. Sensor Outputs ................................................................................................................................................ 8-188.5.7. Power Status (Circuits 1-4)............................................................................................................................. 8-198.5.8. Demand Status ................................................................................................................................................ 8-198.5.9. Load Shed Status............................................................................................................................................. 8-20

8.6. SCHEDULE CONTROL.............................................................................................................................................. 8-208.6.1. Schedule Setup ................................................................................................................................................ 8-218.6.2. Override Schedule........................................................................................................................................... 8-218.6.3. Overrides......................................................................................................................................................... 8-218.6.4. Holiday 1 and Holiday 2 Screens ................................................................................................................... 8-228.6.5. Alternate Week Screens (Weeks 1–4).............................................................................................................. 8-228.6.6. Standard Week ................................................................................................................................................ 8-238.6.7. Global Date Ranges ........................................................................................................................................ 8-248.6.8. Holiday 1 Dates and Holiday 2 Dates ............................................................................................................ 8-248.6.9. Alternate Week Dates...................................................................................................................................... 8-24

8.7. I/O CONTROL.......................................................................................................................................................... 8-258.8. INPUTS .................................................................................................................................................................... 8-25

8.8.1. Input Status ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-258.8.2. Input Setup ...................................................................................................................................................... 8-268.8.3. Combiner......................................................................................................................................................... 8-288.8.4. Filter................................................................................................................................................................ 8-298.8.5. Adjustment....................................................................................................................................................... 8-298.8.6. kW Set Points .................................................................................................................................................. 8-308.8.7. Input Set Points ............................................................................................................................................... 8-308.8.8. Input Overrides ............................................................................................................................................... 8-318.8.9. Output Control ................................................................................................................................................ 8-318.8.10. Output Status................................................................................................................................................. 8-328.8.11. Digital Output Setup ..................................................................................................................................... 8-328.8.12. Logic Screen.................................................................................................................................................. 8-338.8.13. Min On/Off .................................................................................................................................................... 8-34

Page 10: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

vi • Table of Contents 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.8.14. OTMR Setup .................................................................................................................................................. 8-348.8.15. Output Proof.................................................................................................................................................. 8-358.8.16. Output Demand ............................................................................................................................................. 8-368.8.17. Output Bypass ............................................................................................................................................... 8-36

8.9. SYSTEM SETUP........................................................................................................................................................ 8-378.9.1. Daylight Savings and Temperature Setup....................................................................................................... 8-378.9.2. Winter/Summer Setup...................................................................................................................................... 8-388.9.3. Alarms Sent to 485 Alarm Panel ..................................................................................................................... 8-398.9.4. Passwords........................................................................................................................................................ 8-39

8.10. BCU CONFIGURATION.......................................................................................................................................... 8-408.10.1. 16AI Setup ..................................................................................................................................................... 8-418.10.2. Communication Setup ................................................................................................................................... 8-418.10.3. Modem Setup ................................................................................................................................................. 8-428.10.4. Host Network................................................................................................................................................. 8-428.10.5. On-line Status of the Host Network............................................................................................................... 8-438.10.6. Set Device Numbers ...................................................................................................................................... 8-438.10.7. Reset .............................................................................................................................................................. 8-438.10.8. Board Network .............................................................................................................................................. 8-448.10.9. On-line Status of the Board Network ............................................................................................................ 8-448.10.10. Number of I/O Boards ................................................................................................................................. 8-448.10.11. Resetting the I/O Board Network ................................................................................................................ 8-45

9 LOGS AND GRAPHS ............................................................................................................................................. 9-1

9.1. RTC LOGS ................................................................................................................................................................ 9-19.2. INPUT AND DIGITAL OUTPUT.................................................................................................................................... 9-1

9.2.1. Analog Output ................................................................................................................................................... 9-19.2.2. Runtime Hours................................................................................................................................................... 9-29.2.3. Compressor Cycle Counts................................................................................................................................. 9-2

9.3. DEMAND LOGS ......................................................................................................................................................... 9-29.3.1. Hourly Log ........................................................................................................................................................ 9-39.3.2. Daily Demand ................................................................................................................................................... 9-39.3.3. Monthly Demand............................................................................................................................................... 9-39.3.4. Window Log....................................................................................................................................................... 9-39.3.5. Daily Log........................................................................................................................................................... 9-49.3.6. Monthly Log ...................................................................................................................................................... 9-4

9.4. OVERRIDES LOG ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-49.5. SENSOR INPUT LOGS................................................................................................................................................. 9-4

9.5.1. Output Logs ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-59.6. BCU GRAPHS ........................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

9.6.1. Control Screen................................................................................................................................................... 9-59.6.2. View Graph ....................................................................................................................................................... 9-5

10 ALARMS............................................................................................................................................................... 10-1

10.1. ALARM CONTROL ................................................................................................................................................. 10-110.2. RTC ALARMS ....................................................................................................................................................... 10-210.3. ALARMS SCREEN 1 ............................................................................................................................................... 10-310.4. ALARMS SCREEN 2 ............................................................................................................................................... 10-410.5. BCU ALARMS....................................................................................................................................................... 10-4

11 HAND-HELD TERMINAL SCREENS .................................................................................................................... 7

11.1. RTC MAIN MENU....................................................................................................................................................... 811.2. STATUS MENU ............................................................................................................................................................ 811.3. CONTROL MENU ......................................................................................................................................................... 9

Page 11: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Table of Contents • vii

APPENDIX A–TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE FOR THE BCU ......................................................................... A-1

APPENDIX B–BCU TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS......................................................................................... B-1

APPENDIX C–BCU FRONT PANEL SCREENS.................................................................................................... C-1

APPENDIX D–SENSOR HARDWARE/SOFTWARE SETUP TABLE ............................................................... D-1

INDEX........................................................................................................................................................................... I-1

Page 12: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 13: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Introduction • 1-1

1 Introduction

1.1. BCUThe Building Control Unit (BCU) (PN 824-1000) is a microprocessor-based controller designed to provide complete

control of all building and environmental conditions for low-rise commercial retail buildings. The BCU is the controlling component of a three network configuration (I/O, Host, Remote Communication) that includes advanced rooftop control-lers, input and output communication boards, remote communication software, and a variety of sensors, probes, and trans-ducers.

The BCU allows sophisticated and complex design of HVAC, Demand, Schedule, and Alarm control programs, ensur-ing that any commercial building configuration may be cooled, heated, dehumidified, and lit reliably and cost-effectively.

The BCU incorporates a unique modular approach to Input and Output (I/O) control. Individual blocks (or modules) of data may be designed to control and monitor different aspects of an overall environmental control program. When need-ed—or when store requirements change—these modules may be connected together or rearranged using simple logic com-mands and module identifiers.

1.2. ManualThis manual has been revised to give CPC customers better access to BCU related information. This manual has been

divided into smaller sections that are arranged in an order that correlates with a typical BCU installation. The manual begins with a hardware overview and hardware mounting instructions. The next two sections (4 & 5) include information that de-scribes how the REFLECS network operates and is configured. Section 6 is an overview of the software that is used by the BCU. Section 7 presents an outline that can be used as a guide for users who have not installed a BCU system before. The system navigation section of previous manuals has been broken into four new sections: Section 8, System Setup; Section 9, Logs and Graphs; Section 10, Alarms; and Section 11, Hand-Held Terminal Screens.

Appendix A is a guide to troubleshooting commonly experienced problems with the BCU for first time users. If you are experiencing a problem, please refer to Appendix A before calling CPC’s technical support department. If your problem is not addressed in Appendix A, contact CPC for additional help. Appendix B contains a table that lists the technical spec-ifications of the BCU. Screen trees for the BCU are included in Appendix C.

Page 14: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 15: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Overview • 2-1

2 Hardware Overview

2.1. IntroductionComputer Process Controls uses both an RS485 host

network, I/O network, and an RS232 remote communica-tion network to monitor and manage all aspects of building control.

Within the framework of each of these networks, vari-ous components are required to monitor environmental conditions and system performance, control system opera-tion, and interact with remote communication packages.

The “brain” of any CPC network is the REFLECS con-troller. REFLECS is an acronym for (REF)rigeration, (L)ighting, and (E)nvironmental (C)ontrol (S)ystem. The following list categorizes the current REFLECS line of controllers:

Environmental Control

• Building Control Unit (BCU)

• Building Environmental Control (BEC)

Data Logging

• Intelligent Data Logger (IDL)

Refrigeration Control

• Refrigeration Monitor and Control (RMC)

• Refrigeration Monitor and Case Control (RMCC)

CPC REFLECS controllers are designed to perform three specific tasks: system control, system monitoring, and data storage. Each controller—depending on its soft-ware package—is tailored to perform one or all of these three tasks.

In general, a standard environmental control network will consist of the following components:

1. BCU

2. Various input and output communication boards

3. 485 Alarm Panel

4. RS232 Bus Amplifier

5. Remote communication modem & UltraSite

6. Network wiring

7. Sensors and loads

The following sections provide an overview of the function of each of these components.

2.2. Building Control Unit (BCU)The Building Control Unit (P/N 824-1000) primarily

interacts with rooftop HVAC units and provides indepen-dent environmental zone control. In addition, the BCU pro-vides extensive load scheduling and power management features that allow the user to develop HVAC and lighting schedules based on building occupancy levels, times of day, or other parameters.

All building control system components must be con-nected to the BCU for proper monitoring and control of the system. The BCU has connections for I/O, host, and remote communication components. Sensors, lights, and rooftop packages not directly connected to the BCU are accessed by the controller through communication boards.

The BCU uses a modular approach to system setup. Modules may be developed that control lighting or HVAC functions. Changes dictated by season, holiday, or occu-pancy levels are accomplished quickly by using modules to create a complete control system.

The BCU consists of a rugged steel enclosure contain-ing a processor board and Power Interface Board (PIB). The Processor Board (Figure 2-1) contains the LCD screen, the main processor, and the memory chips that hold all the code required to operate the BCU and the data en-tered at the front panel or through UltraSite. The Processor Board is mounted on the door of the enclosure and is con-nected to the PIB with a ribbon cable. The PIB (Figure 2-2) contains all power and network connections required to power the BCU and drive the network, and is attached to the rear wall of the enclosure.

Installation of the BCU consists of mounting the unit in an easily accessible location. All communication boards, additional BCUs, alarms panels, and remote communica-tion equipment must be wired to the BCU. A 120/208 volt power supply is required to provide power to the unit. The BCU must be configured based on the HVAC components to be controlled and the operational schedule of the build-ing as well.

Page 16: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

2-2 • Hardware Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

2.3. Input Communication Boards

To properly interact with any environmental control system, the REFLECS requires constant, accurate system information. CPC provides this information to the RE-FLECS through a series of input communication boards. Except for boards designed to supply both input and output functions, the 16AI Analog Input Board is the only input board used by CPC.

2.3.1. 16AI BoardThe 16AI Analog Input Board (P/N 810-3011) is a gen-

eral-purpose input board capable of receiving an input sig-nal through any of 16 two-wire input connections. To function, the 16AI must be connected through the RS485 I/O network to the REFLECS. When properly installed, the board receives either digital or analog data from sensors wired to any of the 16 input connections located on the board. Input definition screens within the REFLECS allow the user to define each input for building environmental control.

Within an environmental control system, the 16AI may be connected to a watt-hour transducer or power monitor or to temperature and humidity sensors. However, supply air, return air, and space temperature sensors must be wired to the Advanced Rooftop Controller (ARTC).

The 16AI Board is designed with several features that make it easy to install, wire, and configure. These main user interface features are shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-1 - REFLECS Processor Board

Figure 2-2 - Power Interface Board

26502005

LEGENDLCD Screen Contrast Dial

Ribbon Cable Connection to KeypadFlash Memory ChipsManufacture Date

Main Processor ChipRibbon Cable Connection to PowerInterface Board

RAM BatteryClock BatteryNetwork Baud Rate Dip Switch

12345

RAM Chips6

7

89

10

1

2

3

4 5

6

7

8

910

A maximum of six 16AIs may be connected to a BCU through the RS485 COM A and D networks.

Figure 2-3 - 16AI Analog Input Board

Page 17: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Overview • 2-3

2.4. Output Communication Boards

When a REFLECS receives data from the 16AI board, it interprets that information based on current stored set points. System changes required as a result of this exami-nation are then made through one of several output commu-nication boards. CPC offers two different output boards for environmental control: 1) 8RO, Relay Output Board, and 2) 8RO FC, Form C Relay Output Board.

2.4.1. 8RO BoardThe 8RO Relay Board (P/N 810-3002) is a general pur-

pose board capable of supplying an output signal through any of eight standard contact relays.

To function, the 8RO board must be connected through the RS485 I/O network to the REFLECS. When properly installed, the 8RO receives an electrical impulse from the REFLECS, which either opens or closes any of eight con-tact relays. Output definitions within the REFLECS allow the user to configure the 8RO board to interact with any en-vironmental control component.

The 8RO board is the direct link between the REFLECS and environmental control component operation. Informa-tion gathered by the controller from the 16AI board, 8IO board, or ARTC is checked against current stored set points. If differences in the received input data and the set point information are detected, a signal is either sent to the proper 8RO relay, or an existing signal is discontinued. Through the use of this relay signal, environmental control functions can be properly maintained by a simple contact closure sequence that is determined by the REFLECS.

Like the 16AI input board, the 8RO board is easily in-stalled and operated within the CPC network environment because of its straight forward design. Several of these fea-tures are shown in Figure 2-4

2.4.2. 8RO Form C BoardThe 8RO Relay Output Board with Form C contacts (P/N 810-3001) (Figure 2-5) is identical in function to the stan-dard 8RO board, except that it uses relays with form C con-tacts and does not use fail-safe jumpers (wiring the contacts as either normally open or normally closed creates the fail-safe condition). The 8RO-FC is slightly larger than the standard 8RO; therefore, use the mounting instructions for the 8RO-FC provided in Section 3.2., I/O Boards and En-closures, should be used.

A maximum of twelve 8ROs and 8RO-FCs may be connected to a BCU through the RS485 COM A and D networks.

Figure 2-4 - 8RO Relay Output Board

Figure 2-5 - 8RO-FC Relay Output Board with Form C Contacts

Page 18: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

2-4 • Hardware Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

2.5. Special Purpose Communication Boards

Special purpose communication boards are boards that either possess greater capabilities than standard input and output boards, or combine the features of both input and output boards into a single package.

2.5.1. 8IO BoardThe 8IO combination input and output board (P/N 810-

3061) is a communication board designed to provide input and output functions within the same board when space re-strictions do not allow for installation of dedicated boards. Like the 16AI and the 8RO, the 8IO must be connected to the REFLECS to perform input retrieval and output trans-mission functions. The 8IO has input and form C relay out-put connections for monitoring of sensors and control of loads. The 8IO has no memory capability or hand-held ter-minal jack for direct connection to the board. The 8IO is shown in Figure 2-6.

2.6. Advanced Rooftop Control-ler

The Advanced Rooftop Controller (ARTC) (P/N 810-3060), shown in Figure 2-7, is a stand-alone version of the 8IO board, and is used to control rooftop HVAC units. The ARTC controls all functions of the HVAC rooftop control based on set points established within the BCU. Because the ARTC is configured with a Random Access Memory (RAM) chip, microprocessor, and flash memory, it can continue to perform all controlling functions even when communication to the BCU is lost. Furthermore, this same configuration allows the controller to download the most recent control set points to the ARTC after communication is reestablished.

Similar to the BCU, the ARTC has various memory chips that are preprogrammed with default set points. The ARTC is capable of operating a rooftop unit as soon as the ARTC has been wired to an RTU and a single space tem-perature probe. Set points may be altered at any time from the hand-held terminal and are valid until a connection be-tween the ARTC and BCU is made.

The ARTC monitors input data from sensors connected directly to it, and receives additional input data routed through the BCU from sensors connected to other ARTCs or input boards.

When programming the REFLECS, the 8IO must be listed as one 16AI board and one 8RO board.

Figure 2-6 - 8IO Combination Input/Output Communication Board

A maximum of 32 ARTCs may be connected to a BCU through the RS485 COM A and D networks.

Page 19: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Overview • 2-5

2.7. 485 Alarm PanelOne of the most important requirements of any network

environment is its ability to notify personnel of system fail-ures or possible problems. The REFLECS is designed with sophisticated logging, graphing, notification, and alarming features that put system data at the fingertips of the service technician or store manager. However, no network is com-plete without the basic ability to provide annunciated alarms in the event of a serious system problem.

CPC uses the 485 Alarm Panel (P/N 811-4850 or 811-4855) (Figure 2-8) to accomplish this task. The 485 Alarm Panel is linked to all REFLECS Controllers through the RS485 COM B Host Network. Although the alarm panel has many features that make it a powerful notification tool, the primary and most important function of the alarm panel is to receive signals from the REFLECS and deliver alarm annunciation.

The REFLECS constantly compares real time system conditions against user-defined alarm set points. When a system reading falls outside of a set point, a signal is sent to the alarm panel, which in turn, emits an alarm signal and displays the alarm information on the notification screen. Other features of the alarm panel provide the user with ad-ditional information and capabilities. Some of the alarm panels features are:

1. Alarm reset.

2. Date and time adjustment.

3. Storage of twenty separate alarms.

4. Audible annunciation can be set to either pulsed or continuous mode.

5. Interfaces with existing facility alarm system.

6. 25-pin parallel printer port.

Wiring of the alarm panel to the REFLECS is discussed in Section 4.3., RS485 Host Network (COM B).

2.8. Hand-Held TerminalThe Hand-Held Terminal (HHT) (P/N 811-3110),

shown in Figure 2-9, connects directly to the RJ11 jack on an ARTC and is used to make set point and setup adjust-ments either during system start-up or during routine or emergency maintenance.

The HHT displays several screens for viewing RTU status, making control set point adjustments, and bypassing loads on or off. Setpoint changes made through the HHT are not kept when the unit is unplugged from the ARTC and the ARTC is communicating with the REFLECS. If the ARTC is not communicating with the REFLECS, any set-point changes made with the HHT will remain in the ARTC when the HHT is unplugged.

Figure 2-7 - ARTC Advanced Rooftop Controller

Figure 2-8 - 485 Alarm Panel

LEGENDDate/Time Button

Alarm Reset ButtonScreen Scroll Buttons

LED Power IndicatorLCD Alarm ScreenLED Alarm Indicator

123

456

1

2

3

4

5

Page 20: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

2-6 • Hardware Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

2.9. Remote Communication

2.9.1. RS232 Bus AmplifierThe RS232 Bus Amplifier (P/N 812-1800), shown in

Figure 2-10, is used to connect CPC controllers together as an integrated communication system. Communication problems sometimes associated with large control sys-tems—such as limited cable lengths, data rate limitations, and terminal and modem communication interference—are eliminated through the use of the RS232 Bus Amplifier.

2.9.2. ModemsTo communicate with a site from a remote location, the

network must be connected to a modem directly, or through the RS232 Bus Amplifier. CPC offers a standard data mo-dem for use with the REFLECS network.

The REFLECS and CPC’s RS232 Remote Communi-cation Network are designed to connect to and be compat-ible with most modems in use today.

2.9.3. UltraSite™

Remote communication with a site controlled by the REFLECS is accomplished using UltraSite, CPC’s remote communication software package. UltraSite is a Mi-crosoft® Windows™-based program that uses animated graphics, icons, buttons, and tabular and graphical data to display real-time conditions of a site.

UltraSite accesses a site controller through the on-site modem, and, if present, the RS232 Bus Amplifier. All com-mands available through the front panel of the REFLECS as well as some screens not available through the front pan-el may be accessed through UltraSite using pop-up dialog boxes. Dialog boxes that appear in Ultra Site display the same information as would appear on the screen of the con-troller. Changes made to set points in the dialog boxes of UltraSite are immediately transferred to the unit. Individu-als who have access to a laptop or a desktop computer may find it easier to program the REFLECS—especially during a start-up—using UltraSite. A comprehensive guide to UltraSite (P/N 026-1002, UltraSite User’s Guide) is avail-able from CPC.

Figure 2-9 - Hand-Held Terminal

Figure 2-10 - RS232 Bus Amplifier

Page 21: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Mounting • 3-1

3 Hardware Mounting

3.1. Building Control UnitLocation

The Building Control Unit (BCU) is the main controller of the CPC refrigeration control network. As such, it is the component most accessed by store managers and service technicians. The BCU should be located in an easily acces-sible area, but away from customers and most supermarket employees. Generally, the BCU is mounted in an electrical room where access can be controlled. The BCU should be mounted in a location that can be limited in its access. It is a good idea to keep the controller as close to I/O boards as possible.

Mounting

The REFLECS is supplied with 4 mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure. The mounting holes can be ac-cessed without removing any of the boards inside the en-closure. Figure 3-1 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight.

3.2. I/O Boards and EnclosuresLocation

The 16AI, 8RO, 8RO-FC, 8DO, 4AO, and 8IO boards are usually installed within the refrigeration rack or the condenser by the equipment manufacturer. Therefore, the installer need only make the necessary connections be-tween the REFLECS, the condenser boards, and the refrig-erated cases.

In some instances, an installer may be required to mount an I/O board. There are no restrictions on the loca-tion of these boards; however, for ease of network config-uration, it is recommended that the boards be located adjacent to the REFLECS. If the boards are not located near the REFLECS, ensure the leg and segment length restric-tions described in Section 4.5. are followed. The I/O boards may be mounted without an enclosure, but should be mounted in a location that is not easily accessible to avoid tampering or damage.

Single Enclosure Mounting for I/O Boards

The Single enclosure is supplied with 4 mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure. The mounting holes can be accessed without removing any of the boards inside the enclosure. Figure 3-2 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight. Figure 3-6 shows mounting dimensions for the 16AI, 8RO, and the 8DO. Figure 3-7 shows mounting di-mensions for the 8RO-FC.

Double Enclosure Mounting for I/O Boards

The Double enclosure is supplied with 4 mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure. The mounting holes can be accessed without removing any of the boards inside the enclosure. Figure 3-3 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight. Figure 3-6 shows mounting dimensions for the

The operating environment of the BCU is -20°F (-28.9°C) to 120°F (48.9°C), and 0% to 95% humidity—non-condensing.

Figure 3-1 - BCU Mounting Dimensions

Figure 3-2 - Single Enclosure Mounting Dimensions

Page 22: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

3-2 • Hardware Mounting 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

16AI, 8RO, and the 8DO. Figure 3-7 shows mounting di-mensions for the 8RO-FC.

8IO/ARTC Weather Resistant Enclosure Mounting

The 8IO Combination Input/Output Board is generally supplied with a weather resistant enclosure. This enclosure is the same type supplied with the ARTC since both are identical in size.

The weather resistant enclosure is supplied with 4 mounting holes on flanges at the top and bottom of the en-closure. The mounting holes can be accessed without re-moving any of the boards inside the enclosure. Figure 3-4 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight. Figure 3-8 provides mounting dimensions for the 8IO/ARTC.

16AI, 8RO, and 8DO Boards Without Enclosures

16AI, 8RO, and 8DO boards not supplied with an en-closure are supplied with a snap-track for easy installation. The insulation sheet and I/O board must be removed from the track before the track is mounted. The snap-track is mounted using the 0.1875-inch mounting slots. Figure 3-5 shows this installation procedure. Figure 3-6 provides mounting dimensions for the 16AI, 8RO, and the 8DO boards.

Figure 3-3 - Double Enclosure Mounting Dimensions

Figure 3-4 - Weather Resistant Enclosure

Page 23: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Mounting • 3-3

8RO Form C Boards Without Enclosures

The 8RO Form C board is slightly larger than the 16AI and 8RO boards, and is not supplied with a snap-track. If the 8RO-FC is supplied without an enclosure it is supplied with 0.500-inch long metal stand-off dowels which are

pressed into the mounting holes in the board. Figure 3-7 shows the mounting dimensions for the 8RO-FC.

3.2.1. 8IOs/ARTCs Without Enclosures Mounting

8IO and ARTC boards not supplied with an enclosure are supplied with 0.500-inch long metal stand-off dowels that are pressed into the mounting holes in the board. Fig-ure 3-8 shows the mounting dimensions for the 8IO and ARTC boards.

3.3. 485 Alarm PanelLocation

The 485 Alarm Panel is used to alert store personnel to system problems that require immediate attention; there-fore, it is important to mount the panel where it will be vis-ible and easily accessible.

Mounting

The 485 Alarm Panel is supplied with 4 mounting holes in the rear panel of the enclosure. The mounting holes can be accessed without removing any of the boards inside the

Figure 3-5 - 4AO, 8RO, or 16AI Snap-Track Installation

Figure 3-6 - 16AI/8RO/8DO Mounting Dimensions

1. REMOVE THE 16AI OR 8RO BOARD AND THE INSULATOR FROM THE SNAP-TRACK.

2. MOUNT THE SNAP-TRACK USING THE .1875" SLOTS PROVIDED.

3. REINSTALL THE INSULATOR IN THE SNAP-TRACK.

4. REINSTALL THE 16AI OR 8RO BOARD IN THE SLOTS IN THE SNAP-TRACK.

26501040

Figure 3-7 - 8RO-FC Mounting Dimensions

Figure 3-8 - 8IO/ARTC Mounting Dimensions

Page 24: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

3-4 • Hardware Mounting 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

enclosure. Figure 3-9 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight.

3.4. RS232 Bus AmplifierLocation

Although there are no specific location requirements for installation of the RS232 Bus Amplifier, it is recom-mended that the amplifier be located close to the bussed CPC controllers to prevent data loss over long cable lengths. It is also recommended that the bus amplifier be lo-cated adjacent to the modem and, if present, the local com-puter terminal to provide easy access to all components necessary for building control.

In some cases, location of the modem and local termi-nal will not allow location of the bus amplifier to both the modem and local terminal and the CPC controllers. Since data loss is possible when multiple CPC controllers trans-mit data over long cable lengths, it may be necessary to connect the CPC controllers to a remote amplifier adjacent to the controllers, and then connect the remote amplifier to a main amplifier connected to the modem and local termi-nal. For complete information on operation of the RS232 Bus Amplifier, refer to 026-1401, RS232 Bus Amplifier In-stallation and Operation Manual.

Mounting

To mount the RS232 Bus Amplifier,

1. Remove the 4 front panel screws.

2. Remove the front panel (with circuit board at-tached).

3. Mount the empty amplifier body, with the power connection cut-out down.

4. Replace the front panel.

Figure 3-10 shows the enclosure dimensions and weight.

3.5. Advanced Rooftop Control-ler (ARTC)

Location

The ARTC interprets all information from the BCU for controlling the Rooftop Unit (RTU). The ARTC is wired to all loads on the RTU and must be located on the RTU, ei-ther within a weather resistant enclosure, or inside the unit. The ARTC should be easily accessible to technicians since set point adjustment may be made to the ARTC using the Hand-Held Terminal.

Mounting

The ARTC is generally supplied with the RTU, and only needs to be wired to sensors and to the controller for operation. In some cases, the ARTC will not be shipped with the RTU and must be mounted either within the RTU or in a weather resistant enclosure. CPC supplies the ARTC with the same enclosure that is shipped with the 8IO board. This enclosure is UL approved for outdoor applications. Refer to Figure 3-4 for mounting dimensions of this enclo-sure.

If the ARTC is to be mounted within the RTU, refer to Figure 3-8 for board mounting dimensions.

Figure 3-9 - 485 Alarm Panel Mounting Dimensions

Figure 3-10 - RS232 Bus Amplifier Mounting Dimensions

Page 25: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hardware Mounting • 3-5

3.6. Temperature Sensors

3.6.1. Inside Temperature SensorLocation

Inside temperature sensors are supplied within a wall-mounted enclosure for attachment to a standard switch plate.

The temperature sensor should be located in a central location—within the zone to be measured—away from doors, windows, vents, heaters, and outside walls that could affect temperature readings. The sensor should be be-tween 4 and 6 feet from the floor.

Mounting

Mount the sensor using the screws provided as shown in Figure 3-11.

3.6.2. Outside (Ambient) Temperature Sensor

Location

The outside or ambient temperature sensor should be located on the north side of the building, preferably under an eave to prevent sun-heated air from affecting the tem-perature of the sensor.

Mounting

The temperature sensor may be mounted using any standard tubing clamp. CPC also offers an aluminum cover and clamp (P/N 303-1111) which may be mounted as shown in Figure 3-12 (fasteners are not provided).

3.6.3. Insertion Temperature ProbeLocation

The 12-inch insertion temperature probe may be used to monitor temperature in either the supply or return air ducts of the RTU.

Mounting

The insertion probe may be mounted in any orientation within the duct as long as the probe is in the air flow of the duct. The probe housing should be secured using self-tap-ping screws. A 0.250” diameter hole is required for the probe. Figure 3-13 shows the installation of the insertion probe (self-tapping screws are not provided).

3.6.4. Supply and Return Air SensorsIn addition to the 12-inch insertion temperature probe,

CPC uses the same temperature sensor used for outside and inside temperature to monitor supply and return air temper-

Figure 3-11 - Inside Temperature Sensor Mounting

Figure 3-12 - Outside Temperature Sensor with Cover and Clamp

Figure 3-13 - 12-Inch Insertion Probe Mounting

Page 26: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

3-6 • Hardware Mounting 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

ature. When used in this application, the sensors are sup-plied without enclosure covers. The sensors should be mounted directly in the air stream of the supply or return air duct. The sensors are not supplied with any mounting hard-ware for this application.

3.7. Humidity Sensors and Humidistats

Use the installation and operation instructions supplied with these products for all mounting information.

3.8. Dew Point Sensors and Con-trol Switches

3.8.1. Dew Cell Dew Point ProbeLocation

The Dew Cell Dew Point Probe should be located 4-6 feet from the floor with the probe pointing up. It is recom-mended that the Dew Cell Dew Point Probe be mounted in an area where it will be exposed only to minimal amounts of dust.

Mounting

Mount the probe using the standard switch cover sup-plied with the unit as shown in Figure 3-14.

3.8.2. Dew Point Control SwitchUse the installation and operation instructions supplied

with this product for all mounting information.

3.9. Light Level SensorLocation

The Light Level Sensor should be located facing north (away from direct sunlight).

Mounting

The light level sensor is not supplied with mounting hardware. The sensor should be mounted horizontally through the knockout of a standard weather-resistant junc-tion box. Figure 3-15 shows a typical mounting configura-tion.

3.10. Power MonitorsCPC uses standard off-the-shelf power monitors for

power monitoring. Installation instructions supplied with monitoring units should be used for both the watt-hour transducer and the transducer power supply.

3.11. TransformersTransformers should be located within 10 feet of the

board it is powering, preferably within the board enclosure. Use the installation instructions supplied with the trans-former for specific mounting details.

Figure 3-14 - Dew Cell Dew Point Probe Mounting

Figure 3-15 - Light Level Sensor Typical Mounting

Page 27: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual The REFLECS Networks • 4-1

4 The REFLECS Net-works

4.1. IntroductionThe REFLECS uses four separate communication net-

works:

1. The RS485 Input/Output (I/O) Network (labeled COM A) connects the controller to the input and output communication boards.

2. The RS485 Host Network (labeled COM B) con-nects multiple controllers to a 485 alarm panel.

3. The RS232 Remote Communication Network (labeled COM C) connects multiple controllers to a modem, thus allowing remote communication.

4. The RS485 Input/Output (I/O) Network (labeled COM D) is an additional I/O network that connects the controller to the input and output communica-tion boards and is only available on new style PIBs (P/N 537-3211).

The following sections provide an overview of the ba-sic network components and their function. Wiring require-ment for each network type is provided in Section 5, Wiring for Network & Power Connections.

4.2. RS485 Input/Output (I/O) Net-work (COM A and D)

The RS485 Input/Output (I/O) network connects all in-put and output communication boards together in an open communication loop through either COM A or COM D of the REFLECS unit. This loop, or "daisy chain," connects the REFLECS to multiple input and output communication boards, and terminates at the last input or output board on the network.

The REFLECS is configured to monitor and control two separate RS485 input/output communication net-works. These two networks are labeled as either COM A or COM D. Each network is capable of supporting up to 31 separate I/O boards, plus a single REFLECS controller. This means that one REFLECS can monitor and control up to 62 individual input or output boards. Figure 4-1 shows the I/O network configurations.

The concept of a loop is critical to operation of the I/O network. The REFLECS cannot properly interact with the input and output boards unless the boards are connected and identified within the confines of the daisy chain. The I/O network is always identified as COM A or COM D on the controller. Input and output communication boards are configured with a RS 485 network connection only, which can be used to connect the board to either COM A or COM D.

In addition to the daisy chain arrangement, a single star configuration may be connected to the daisy chain. A more in-depth explanation of CPC network wiring practices is provided in Section 5, Wiring for Network & Power Con-nections.

4.3. RS485 Host Network (COM B)

Similar to the I/O network loop, the host network, shown in Figure 4-2, also uses an open loop configuration. The primary function of the Host Network Loop is to allow single or multiple REFLECS Controllers to be connected together to one common 485 Alarm Panel. The Host Net-work is always labeled as COM B on the REFLECS. Input

Figure 4-1 - Network Daisy Chain Wiring Configurations

Page 28: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

4-2 • The REFLECS Networks 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

and output boards cannot be connected directly to the host network.

4.4. RS232 Remote Communica-tion Network (COM C)

The RS232 Remote Communication Network connects single or multiple REFLECS Controllers to a modem to provide remote access using a remote communication soft-ware package. In some configurations, an RS232 Bus Am-plifier may be installed to improve transmission rates and overall data quality. Like the host network, input and out-put boards cannot be connected directly to the remote com-munication network. Figure 4-3 shows a typical remote communication network layout.

4.5. Legs and SegmentsA leg is defined as a cable running between two devices

such as two communication boards, or a REFLECS unit and a communication board. A segment is defined as the to-tal combined length of all legs connected to one REFLECS power interface board output connection such as the COM

A or COM D connections. Figure 4-4 demonstrates the re-lationship between legs and segments.

4.6. Leg and Segment Wire Length

A single segment connected to COM A, B, or D may not exceed 4000 feet. Therefore, the combined length of all legs in a single segment may not exceed 4000 feet. This length restriction includes the length of legs in a single star configuration described in Section 4.9., Star Configura-tions.

A single segment connected to COM C may not exceed 2500 feet.

4.7. Number of Devices per Seg-ment

A single segment may have no more than 32 devices. A device is considered to be any controller, board, or alarm panel including the “parent” controller. That is, a unit with a single segment connected to COM A may have an addi-tional 31 devices connected to the segment.

There are restrictions to the number of each board type that may be connected to the COM A and D networks. COM A and COM D can handle no more than twelve 8ROs or 8RO-FCs, six 16AIs, and thirty-two ARTCs at the same time on both the COM A and COM D networks. In addi-tion, an 8IO board is counted as one 16AI and one 8RO.

4.8. Daisy ChainsExcept for the single star configuration described be-

low, all devices in a segment must be connected in an open loop or “daisy chain” configuration. A daisy chain must start with the first device in the segment and continue to the last device. Branching from a device in the middle of the

Figure 4-2 - RS485 Host Communication Network (COM B)

Figure 4-3 - RS232 Remote Communication Network (COM C)

Figure 4-4 - Relationship Between Legs and a Segment

Page 29: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual The REFLECS Networks • 4-3

segment is prohibited. Figure 4-5 demonstrates correct and incorrect daisy chain configurations.

4.9. Star ConfigurationsWithin a single segment, a single star branching from a

single device is allowable. A star is multiple devices con-nected to a single device within a segment. The device from which the star extends is called the hub. The legs within a star may not exceed 100 feet. No more than one star in a single segment is permitted. Star configurations are not permitted on the COM B (Host) and COM C (Remote Communication) networks. Figure 4-6 shows correct and incorrect star configurations.

4.10. Terminating Resistance Jumpers (COM A, COM B, and COM D Only)

Each device that may be connected to a network seg-ment has a set of terminating resistance jumpers (one jump-er for each wire lead). These jumpers are always labeled JU1, JU2, and JU3 for COM A. COM B jumpers are al-ways labeled JU4, JU5, and JU6. COM D jumpers are al-ways labeled JU9, JU10, and JU11.

The purpose of the jumpers is to indicate the two ends, or termination points, of the segment. If a segment contains a star, the hub of the star must be one of the segment termi-nation points. The other termination point in the star con-figuration is the longest leg contained in the network.

If a device is at either end of a segment in a daisy chain cofiguration (Figure 4-7), or if the device is the hub of a star configuration (Figure 4-8), the terminating resistance jumpers must be set in the up position. All other devices in a segment should have their jumpers set to the down posi-tion. No segment shall have more than two devices with the terminating resistance jumpers in the up position.

Figure 4-5 - Correct and Incorrect Loop Configurations

Figure 4-6 - Correct and Incorrect Star Configurations

Figure 4-7-Terminating Jumpers for a "Daisy Chain" Configuration

Figure 4-8-Jumper Settings for Star Network

DAISY CHAIN CONFIGURATION

SET TERMINATING JUMPERS:

UP DOWN DOWN UP

26513088

Page 30: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

4-4 • The REFLECS Networks 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

4.11. Network Dip Switches and Rotary Dials (COM A and D only)

Each device that may be connected to a segment has ei-ther a network dip switch or rotary dials that provide a unique identifier for each device on the network. Devices on a segment may be numbered in any order; however, gaps or omissions in the numbering sequence are not per-mitted. For example, if a segment contains four devices, then board addresses one, two, three, and four must be used; one, two, three, and five would not be permitted.

When setting network dip switches and dials, both COM A and COM D must be considered together. If the last device on COM A is numbered five, then the first de-vice on COM D must be numbered six.

The REFLECS automatically identifies the board types on the network. Boards that are the same type are numbered together. For example, if a segment contains four 16AI boards and five 8RO boards, the 16AIs are numbered one, two, three, and four; and the 8ROs are numbered one, two, three, four, and five. Figure 4-9 provides a graphic repre-sentation of board numbering for two 16AIs, three 8ROs, and two 8IOs. Actual dip switch and rotary dial setup is de-scribed fully in Section 4.15., Fail-Safe Dip Switch Settings.

4.12. Baud Rate Dip Switches (COM A and D)

All networks (COM A, B, C, D) have specific baud rate requirements; however, only COM A and COM D require manual setting of the baud rate dip switch. Currently, the baud rate dip switch in network components must be set to 9600. Setting of the baud rate is accomplished using switch S1 on the REFLECS processor board, the RS485 alarm panel board, and 4AO, 8RO, and 8RO-FC output boards; and switch S3 on the 16AI input board. The COM B baud rate is preset on the REFLECS and 485 Alarm Panel dip switch S1 at 4800. The ARTC and 8IO boards are set auto-

matically at 9600. Actual baud rate setup is described fully in Section 4.13., Network Settings.

4.13. Network SettingsFor all boards, except 8IO and ARTC boards, the net-

work dip switch labeled S1 (or S3 for the 16AI board) is used to set the unique board number of the unit and the baud rate. The 8IO uses rotary dials to set the board number of the unit.

4.13.1. Network AddressesBoard numbering is accomplished using the first five

rockers on dip switch S3 on the 16AI board, the first five rockers on dip switch S1 on the 8RO and 8RO-FC boards, and two rotary dials on the 8IO and ARTC boards.

Dip Switches

Each of the first five rockers of either S1 or S3 is given a value which is twice as large as the value for the rocker to the left of it. The first rocker is given a value of one. With these five rockers, a board may be given any value between 1 and 31; however, network restrictions limit the actual number of boards that may reside on both the COM A and COM D networks at one time. These restrictions are given in Section 4.7., Number of Devices per Segment. Use Fig-ure 4-10 to determine the switch settings for 16AI, 8RO, and 8RO-FC boards.

If a pulse type input is connected to a 16AI Board with software older than version E.02, the input must be con-nected to point one, and rocker number eight on the board’s network dip switch and must be configured to the ON or up position.

Figure 4-9 - Network Device Numbering

Figure 4-10 - Network Address Settings for Dip Switch S1 or S3 on I/O Boards

Page 31: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual The REFLECS Networks • 4-5

Rotary Dials

Both the ARTC and the 8IO boards use rotary dials to set the network address instead of dip switches; however, the setting of these dials is slightly different for each board.

Numbering Rooftop Controllers

The rotary dials labeled S1 and S2 on the ARTC may be set for any value between 1 and 99; however only 32 ARTCs may be defined for control by a single BCU. Use Figure 4-11 to determine the dial settings for the ARTC.

Numbering 8IO Boards

The 8IO board uses rotary dials to set the network ad-dress instead of dip switches. The rotary dial S1 is used to define the output portion of the board. Therefore, the board may only be defined as board 1 through 9. Likewise, dial S2 is used to define the input portion of the board and may be set from 1 to 9.

LED Indicator Lights

Each board contains a green LED Power Indicator Light. This light indicates whether or not the board is re-ceiving power. It is also a good indication if the board is on-line when the LED pulses.

4.14. Baud Rate Settings

4.14.1. 8IO/ARTCBaud rate settings for the 8IO and ARTC boards are au-

tomatically adjusted by the board based on the baud rate setting of the RMCC. The 8IO and ARTC can communi-cate at baud rates between 4800 and 38,400 baud.

4.14.2. COM BThe COM B baud rate is preset on the RMCC and 485

Alarm Panel dip switch S1 at 4800 baud since the 485 alarm panel can only communicate at 4800 baud.

4.14.3. COM CThe COM C baud rate setting is established within the

remote communications screens in the RMCC and is relat-ed to the speed of the modem being used at the store. The RMCC can communicate at 300, 1200, 2400, and 9600 baud. It is recommended that a baud rate of 9600 be used for remote communication.

4.15. Fail-Safe Dip Switch SettingsCPC uses two fail-safe devices on its output boards: a

dip switch and jumpers. These two devices are used to pro-vide fail-safe operation of equipment in the event of either power loss or network communication loss. The use of these devices differs depending on the board or controller.

Boards using Form C contacts do not have fail-safe de-vices, since the contacts are wired for the position required during power loss, but have a dip switch which illuminates the LED relay indicator depending on the contact position.

The 8RO has both a fail-safe dip switch (S2) to force the contacts open or closed if the network fails, and a jump-er for each output (JU4 through JU11) that forces the con-tact open or closed during a power loss. Figure 4-13 shows the possible settings for the dip switch and jumpers.

Figure 4-11 - Network Address Settings for Rotary Dials S1 and S2

Figure 4-12-Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings

Figure 4-13 - 8RO Board Fail-Safe Dip Switch and Jumper Settings

Page 32: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

4-6 • The REFLECS Networks 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

The ARTC, 8IO, and 8RO-FC have a dip switch (S2) which indicates the state of the relay (NC or NO). When the relay is set normally closed, the appropriate LED relay in-dicator (one through eight) is illuminated. Dip switch rock-ers one through eight should be set to the up position if the relay is wired normally closed and down if the relay is wired normally open.

4.16. Input Type Dip Switch Settings

The 16AI and 8IO/ARTC Boards have an input type dip switch that is used to establish the type of inputs connected to the board. There is one dip switch rocker for each of the 16 inputs available on the board.

Set the rocker down for sensors requiring voltage. Set the rocker up for sensors that do not require voltage.

Figure 4-14-Dip Switch Settings for Inputs

26501070

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

8

8

1

1

ON

ON

S2

S1

INPUTS 9-16

INPUTS 1-8

Set DOWN forsensors requiringvoltage

Set UP forsensors not requiringvoltage

Page 33: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Wiring for Network & Power Connections • 5-1

5 Wiring for Network & Power Connections

This section describes how to wire the CPC refrigera-tion control system. Information is provided for the RE-FLECS and all sensors, alarm panels, modems, loads, and output functions.

Any communications (network) connections are made through the communications port (Figure 5-1).

5.1. Wiring SpecificationsAll CPC I/O and host bus communication components

(COM A and D, and COM B) have been designed to con-form to RS485 standards. Remote communication compo-nents (COM C) have been designed to conform to RS232 standards. When wiring CPC components together, it is necessary to follow the rules and requirements specified in this section to ensure proper communication between net-work devices and effective control of building equipment. Unless noted, all information in this section pertains to COM A, B, C, and D networks. Information provided in Section 5, conform to these requirements.

Network wiring must meet or exceed the following specifications:

RS485 (COM A, B, and D)

• Shielded twisted pair

• 18 - 24 AWG wire

• 31 pf/ft maximum capacity between signal wires

• 59 pf/ft maximum capacity between signal and shield

• 120 ± 50 ohm nominal impedance

• Belden part number 8641 (for plenum installations: 82641 or 88641)

RS232 (COM C)

• Shielded

• 22 AWG wire

• 23 pf/ft max cap. between signal wires

• 41 pf/ft max cap. between signal and shield

• Belden part number 8771

5.2. COM A and D WiringConnect the three-wire COM A/COM D network cable

to the REFLECS and I/O board 485 network connections as shown in Figure 5-1.

5.3. COM B WiringConnect the three-wire COM B network cable to the

REFLECS controllers and 485 Alarm Panel as shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-1 - COM A Network Connections

Figure 5-2 - COM B Network Connections

26513032

COM A COM C

TB2 RS485TB1 RS485

+B 0V -B+A 0V -A

COM DCOM B

NE

T

COMMUNICATIONPORT

OTHERBOARDS 26513032

POWER INTERFACE BOARD

16AI/8RO/8IO/ARTC

POWER ON

POWER IN

GND NEU HOT

POWERAC1 0V AC2

+485

-485

0V

Page 34: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

5-2 • Wiring for Network & Power Connections 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

5.4. COM C WiringConnect the three-wire COM C network cable to the

REFLECS controllers and modem as shown in Figure 5-3.

5.5. Sensor and Transducer Wir-ing

All sensors and transducers must be wired to either a 16AI, ARTC, or 8IO. Space temp (including sensors with the override button), supply air, and return air sensors—re-gardless of type—used to control a rooftop unit must be connected to the 16AI or 8IO. Sensors used to measure light level, humidity, etc. may be connected to the 16AI and 8IO also.

Table 5-1 shows the typical wiring scheme of the 16AI. Wiring to the 8IO is identical. If a transducer, probe, or sen-sor requires power, set the dip switch that corresponds to the point number where the transducer, probe, or sensor is connected to the down position (except for the Dew Cell Dew Point Probe).

.Figure 5-3 - COM C Network Connection

P/N Sensor

Connect to Input Point by Board

Type

Wiring

Various Temp Sensors and Probes

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-Any Temp or Aux Input

1. Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even numbered terminal (polarity insensitive).

2. Set input dip switch up.

Various Digital Sensors (Klixons, Sail Switches, etc.)

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Connect one lead to the odd numbered terminal and the other lead to the even num-bered terminal (polarity insen-sitive).

2. Set input dip switch up.

Table 5-1 - Sensor Wiring

Page 35: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Wiring for Network & Power Connections • 5-3

800-1100

800-1200

800-1500

Pressure Trans-ducers (Eclipse) 100, 200, 500 lb. ratings

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Connect RED power wire to +5VDC supply on input board.

2. Connect WHITE signal wire to even numbered terminal.

3. Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered ter-minal.

4. Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal.

5. Set input dip switch down.

800-0100

800-0200

800-0500

Pressure Trans-ducers (Stan-dard) 100, 200, 500 lb. ratings

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Connect RED wire to +12VDC source on input board.

2. Connect WHITE signal wire to even numbered terminal.

3. Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal.

4. Connect the bare SHIELD wire to odd numbered terminal.

5. Set input dip switch down.

203-5750 Relative Humid-ity Sensor

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Wire the “P” sensor terminal to 12VDC supply on board.

2. Wire the “GND” sensor terminal to odd numbered terminal.

3. Wire the “OUT” sensor terminal to even numbered terminal.

4. Jumper sensor terminal “N” to sensor terminal “GND”.

5. Set input dip switch down.

P/N Sensor

Connect to Input Point by Board

Type

Wiring

Table 5-1 - Sensor Wiring

Page 36: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

5-4 • Wiring for Network & Power Connections 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

206-0002 Light Level 16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Wire GREEN ground wire to odd numbered termi-nal.

2. Wire YELLOW and RED signal wires to even numbered termi-nal.

3. Wire the POWER wire to a +12VDC source on input board.

4. Set input dip switch down.

207-0100 Analog Liquid Level

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

1. Connect RED power wire to +12VDC source on input board.

2. Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered terminal.

3. Connect GREEN sig-nal wire to even num-bered terminal.

4. Set input dip switch down.

207-1000 Refrigerant Level Trans-ducer (Hansen Probe)

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

1. Wire BLACK ground wire from “GND” sensor ter-minal to odd num-bered board terminal.

2. Wire GREEN sig-nal wire from “SIG-NAL” sensor terminal to even numbered board ter-minal.

3. Wire RED power wire from “POWER” sensor terminal to +12VDC terminal on board.

4. Set input dip switch down.

P/N Sensor

Connect to Input Point by Board

Type

Wiring

Table 5-1 - Sensor Wiring

2 31

=

6

TO ODD #TERMINAL

TO EVEN #TERMINAL

TO +12VDCON BOARD

RE

D (

PO

WE

R)

*5((16,*1$/

PO

WE

RG

ND

SIG

NA

L

Page 37: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Wiring for Network & Power Connections • 5-5

203-1902 Dew Point Probe

16AI-Any Available Point

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

1. Connect the WHITE and GREEN wires to AC1 and AC2 power terminals.

2. Connect BLACK ground wire to odd numbered board terminal.

3. Connect RED signal wire to even num-bered board terminal.

4. Set input dip switch up.

550-2500

550-2550

KW Transducer 16AI (E.02 and Above)-Any Available Point

16AIs Below v. E.02-Pulse Accumulator Must be Con-nected to Point 1

8IO-Any Avail-able Input Point

ARTC-An Aux Input

4-20 mA Output to Input Board

1. Wire positive transducer terminal to positive 24VDC supply.

2. Wire negative transducer terminal to odd numbered input terminal.

3. Wire negative 24VDC supply to even numbered input terminal.

4. Place 250Ω resistor across odd and even numbered input terminals.

5. Set input dip switch down.

Pulse Accumulator Output to Input Board1. If the input board is an 8IO or a 16AI version E.02

or greater, connect the two KWH terminals to the input point (polarity insensitive)

2. If the input board is a 16AI version less than E.02, connect the KWH terminals to board point 1. Set input switch #1 DOWN, and set network switch #8 UP.

3. Set input dip switch up.

P/N Sensor

Connect to Input Point by Board

Type

Wiring

Table 5-1 - Sensor Wiring

Page 38: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

5-6 • Wiring for Network & Power Connections 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

5.6. Power Connection Wiring

5.6.1. Power RequirementsEach board used with the BEC has specific power re-

quirements. These requirements determine how many boards may be wired to each transformer. Power require-

ments for each board on the RMCC network are listed in Table 5-2.

5.6.2. Power TransformersTransformers for powering the input and output boards

should be wired according to Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 depending on the number and type of boards being pow-ered.

To select a power transformer for a board or a series of boards:

1. Determine what the total VA is for the boards that will be powered by the transformer.

EX: Two 8IOs (18.0 VA each), and one 4AO (10.0 VA) boards are to be powered by one transformer

2. Use a transformer that has a power rating higher than the total calculated VA (see Fig-ure 5-4).

EX: Three board transformer (56 VA) is suf-ficient

56 VA is greater than 46 VA

16AI 8RO 4AO 8DO 8IO 485 Alarm

amps 0.25 0.75 0.5 1.5 0.75 0.1 / 0.05

VA 5.0 15.0 10.0 18 18 12

V AC 24 24 24 24 24 120 / 208

Center Tap Used

YES YES YES YES NO N/A

Table 5-2 - Power Requirements

Three-Board

Six-Board Ten-Board

P/N 640-0043 640-0045 640-0048

Power Rating

56 VA 100 VA 175 VA

Figure 5-4-Power Ratings for CPC Transformers

2( 18VA ) 1( 10VA )×+× 46VA=

Figure 5-5 - Wiring for 640-0043, Three Board, and 640-0045, Six Board Transformer

26513001

208 VAC110 VAC

11

22

44

55

FOR 208 VAC POWER SOURCEFOR 110 VAC POWER SOURCE

1010

88

66

AC1AC1

0V0V

AC2AC2

PINOUT

10 8 6

1 2 4 5

Page 39: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Wiring for Network & Power Connections • 5-7

5.6.2.1. Wiring the 16AI, 8RO, 4AO, or 8DO

The 16AI, 8RO, 4AO, and 8DO all require the use of a center tap. The number of boards that need power will de-termine the transformer size that is required. (see Section 5.6.2., Power Transformers). It is important that the trans-former size match the board’s power requirement.

Figure 5-7 diagrams the wiring for three 16AIs, 8ROs, 4AOs, or 8DOs, or any combination of the four board types. These boards all use a center tap configuration for grounding.

5.6.2.2. Wiring the 8IO Board

The 8IO board can be wired for power in three different ways:

1. By itself with one transformer for power (Figure 5-8)

2. In combination with a or multiple 16AI, 8RO, 4AO, or 8DO boards(Figure 5-9)

3. On a 24 V AC line with the ground in the sys-

Figure 5-6 - Wiring for 640-0048, Ten Board Transformer

Figure 5-7-Wiring for Three 16AIs, 8ROs, 4AOs, or 8DOs or Any Combination of

Page 40: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

5-8 • Wiring for Network & Power Connections 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

tem on either side of the power line or with no ground in the system at all (Figure 5-10)

When the 8IO board is used by itself, it is satisfactory to wire the board with no grounding on either side of the 24 V AC power supply.

When the 8IO board is wired in conjunction with other boards, the 8IO board is not grounded through the other board’s center tap. A seperate Earth ground should be run off of the 8IO.

Figure 5-8-Single 8IO Board Wired to One Transformer

Figure 5-9-8IO Board Wired in Combination with A or Multiple 16AI, 8RO, 4AO, 8DO

Page 41: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Wiring for Network & Power Connections • 5-9

When the 8IO is wired alone, either or neither side of the power supply may be grounded however, a seperate Earth ground should be made off of the center terminal (power connection).

Figure 5-10-One 8IO Wired to a 24 V AC Line with a Ground on Either Side

Page 42: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 43: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-1

6 Software Overview

The following section will discuss the frequently used control functions within the BCU. For specific screen de-scriptions, please refer to the related screens in Section 8, Section 9, and Section 10.

6.1. Zone Management

A zone is a separate, distinct area that has unique cool-ing, heating, dehumidifying, and economizing require-ments. In terms of a building control system, a zone is a single ARTC or group of ARTCs that control environmen-tal conditions using the same Zone Set Points. Figure 6-1 provides a good graphical representation of three typical zones in a retail application.

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.2. RTC Board Assignments

Section 8.4.5. Temp CTL A

Section 8.4.4. Zone Schedule Setup

Section 8.4.1. Zone Status

Figure 6-1-Sample Store Layout with Zones

26504001

Page 44: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-2 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Each ARTC must be assigned to a specific zone. The BCU allows the user to arbitrarily assign and reassign ARTCs to zones. There may be more than one ARTC per zone, but no more than 32. An ARTC may not belong to more than one zone. ARTCs may be assigned to specified zones from the RTC Board Assignments screen (see Sec-tion 8.4.2.).

Within each zone, all HVAC functions performed by the ARTCs will be controlled by the same set points and schedules (lighting control is not zone-based). These set points are continuously compared to current environmental conditions to determine if the current HVAC stage should be activated or deactivated. Zone Set Points include heat and cool set points for summer and winter, inside dew point and inside humidity set points for dehumidification, econ-omization set points, and alarm set points for space and supply temperatures. Zone Set Points are defined at the Temp CTL A screen (see Section 8.4.5.).

Each zone must be tied to a programmable schedule, which defines when occupied and unoccupied zone set points should be used. Multiple schedules may be defined to vary control of the zone during normal and holiday times. Schedules for each zone are defined at the Zone Schedule Setup screen (see Section 8.4.4.).

The BCU displays the status of each zone using the Zone Status screen (see Section 8.4.1.). This screen dis-plays the number of ARTCs defined in a zone, ARTC loca-tion, current space and set point temperatures, current outside temperature, and the current humidity. Current heat and cool set points for each zone are also displayed.

6.2. Scheduling

A schedule is a grouping of dates and times that desig-nates when a building is occupied and unoccupied or when a particular system or component should be activated and deactivated. Each of the 56 available schedules in the BCU is actually a combination of six schedules: one standard weekly schedule, two alternate weekly schedules, two hol-iday daily schedules, and one override daily schedule. Schedules for each zone are defined from the Schedule Set-up screen (see Section 8.6.1.).

All HVAC and lighting functions may be controlled us-ing a schedule. Each schedule is composed of two separate ON and OFF operation times for the specified schedule. These ON and OFF times determine when the system will be active or inactive. Only systems assigned to be con-trolled by the schedule will be affected.

The Standard Week schedule is composed of ON/OFF times for day to day business hours.

The Alternate Week schedules are used to plan for known hours personnel will be in the store apart from stan-dard business hours. Alternate week schedules are com-posed of ON/OFF times for these known personnel hours and will override the standard week schedule.

The Holiday Daily schedules are schedule overrides for long holidays. The holiday schedule overrides both the standard week schedule and the alternate week schedules.

The Override Daily schedules allow users to set holiday times that do not fit under the regular schedules. Once acti-vated, schedule overrides take precedence over all other schedules. The override daily schedule—unlike all other schedules—begins as soon as times are entered.

Schedule ON and OFF times may be defined at the Zone Schedule Setup screen (see Section 8.4.4.).

Holiday and alternate week schedules are activated ac-cording to specified dates. These dates are called global date ranges. The BCU will also update these schedule dates each year if the schedule will be the same from year to year. Global date ranges are defined from the Global Date Rang-es screen (see Section 8.6.7.).

Once schedules have been defined, they are tied to spe-cific systems or components by entering the specific sched-ule number at various input, output, or RTC set points screen depending on the component or system to be con-trolled.

6.3. Heating

The ARTC is a stand-alone controller with the capabil-ity of controlling up to four heat stages. Two heat stages are

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.6.1. Schedule Setup

Section 8.4.4. Zone Schedule Setup

Section 8.6.7. Global Date Ranges

The Active flag must be set from one of the six schedule screens to activate the main schedule.

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

Section 8.4.3. Control Methods

Section 8.4.5. Temp CTL A

Section 8.4.1. Zone Status

The ARTC controls all functions of the RTU—ex-cept economization and dehumidification—without in-put from the BCU.

Page 45: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-3

pre-defined in the controller. Two auxiliary outputs may be defined by the user to control additional heat stages. To de-fine auxiliary outputs, see Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup.

To control HVAC heat stages, the ARTC monitors in-put data from temperature sensors connected directly to it, and may receive additional input data routed through the BCU from temperature sensors connected to other ARTCs or input boards. The temperature readings from these sen-sors, or control temperatures, determine the status of a heat stage within the ARTC.

The following control temperatures may be monitored within the BCU: RTC space temperature, average RTC temperature, maximum RTC temperature, minimum RTC temperature, average zone temperature, maximum zone temperature, minimum zone temperature, average BCU temperature, maximum BCU temperature, minimum BCU temperature, or RTC return temperature (see Section 8.4.3., Control Methods).

After the ARTC receives the control temperature val-ues from the temperature sensors, these values are com-pared with temperature set points defined for the zone. Zone set points may be defined for summer and for winter. These values may also be set to change according to the oc-cupied or unoccupied status of the building. These set points are what the BCU uses to determine if a stage of heat should be turned ON.

If the control temperature drops below the dead band around the heat set point, the ARTC will call for a stage of heat. After the specified ON delay, the first stage of heat will be activated (the Dead Band is a zone equally above and below the set point within which the temperature level is considered to be acceptable). Time delays are specified measurements of time the ARTC must wait before activat-ing or deactivating a stage of heat.

After the first stage of heat is activated, the ARTC will compare the control temperatures again after the specified ON delay. If the control temperature remains below the dead band, the ARTC will call for the second stage of heat. Stages of heat will be activated until there are no more out-puts defined for heat, or until the control temperature rises within or above the dead band. All activated stages of heat will remain ON until the control temperature rises above the dead band. When the control temperature is within the dead band, no stages of heat will be activated or deactivat-ed.

When the control temperature rises above the dead band, the last activated stage of heat will be turned off after the OFF delay. The ARTC will compare the control tem-peratures again after the specified OFF delay. If the control temperature remains above the dead band, each of the re-maining stages of heat will be deactivated (See Figure 6-

2). To define heat set points, see Section 8.4.5., Temp CTL A.

ARTCs may also be set to lock out heat stages. Lockout values specify the system to keep heat stages off during the summer regardless of the control temperature reading.

The status of specific zone heat set points and current zone temperature may be monitored from the zone status screen (see Section 8.4.1., Zone Status).

6.4. Cooling

The ARTC is a stand-alone controller with the capabil-ity of controlling up to four cool stages. Two cool stages are pre-defined in the controller, and two auxiliary outputs can be defined by the user to control additional cool stages. To define auxiliary outputs, see Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup.

To control HVAC cool stages, the ARTC monitors in-put data from temperature sensors connected directly to it, and may receive additional input data routed through the

Figure 6-2 - Heat Dead Band

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

Section 8.4.3. Control Methods

Section 8.4.5. Temp CTL A

Section 8.4.1. Zone Status

The ARTC controls all functions of the RTU—ex-cept economization and dehumidification—with or without input from the BCU.

Page 46: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-4 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

BCU from temperature sensors connected to other ARTCs or input boards. The temperature readings from these sen-sors, or control temperatures, determine the status of a cool stage within the ARTC.

The following control temperatures may be monitored within the BCU: RTC space temperature, average RTC temperature, maximum RTC temperature, minimum RTC temperature, average zone temperature, maximum zone temperature, minimum zone temperature, average BCU temperature, maximum BCU temperature, minimum BCU temperature, or RTC return temperature (see Section 8.4.3., Control Methods).

After the ARTC receives the control temperature val-ues from the temperature sensors, these values are com-pared with temperature set points defined for the zone. Zone set points may be defined for summer and for winter. These values may also be set to change according to the oc-cupancy status of the building. These set points determine if a stage of cool should be turned ON.

If the control temperature rises above the dead band around the cool set point, the ARTC will call for a stage of cool. After the specified ON delay, the first stage of cool will be activated (the Dead Band is a zone equally above and below the set point within which the temperature level is considered to be acceptable). Time delays are specified measurements of time the ARTC must wait before activat-ing or deactivating a stage of cool. After the first stage of cool is activated, the ARTC will compare the control tem-peratures again after the specified ON delay. If the control temperature remains above the dead band, the ARTC will call for the second stage of cool. Stages of cool will be ac-tivated until there are no more outputs defined for cool, or until the control temperature falls within or below the dead band. All activated stages of cool will remain ON until the control temperature falls below the dead band. When the control temperature is within the dead band, no stages of cool may be activated or deactivated.

When the control temperature falls below the dead band, the last activated stage of cool will be turned off after the OFF delay. The ARTC will compare the control tem-peratures again after the specified OFF delay. If the control temperature remains below the dead band, each of the re-maining stages of cool will be deactivated (See Figure 6-3). To define cool set points, see Section 8.4.5., Temp CTL A.

ARTCs may also be set to lock out cool stages. Lockout values specify the system to keep cool stages off during the winter regardless of the control temperature reading.

The status of specific zone cool set points and current zone temperature may be monitored from the zone status screen (see Section 8.4.1., Zone Status).

6.5. Dehumidification

In addition to heat and cool control, the BCU may also control the humidity level. The BCU and ARTC use cool stages to dehumidify unless an auxiliary output is defined as a dehumidifier and the “Maximum Cools for Dehumid-ification” field is set to zero (see Section 8.4.14., RTC Set-up). Each ARTC is capable of monitoring humidity with up to two user-defined input sensors. Humidity sensors may be connected to any ARTC auxiliary input in the zone (see Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup). These zone sensors are set up to monitor relative humidity or inside dew point. To

Figure 6-3 - Cool Dead Band

If lockout of cool stages is enabled, dehumidifica-tion using cool stages will not occur.

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.14. RTC Setup

Section 8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

Section 8.4.6. RH% Inside

Section 8.4.1. Zone Status

Page 47: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-5

define zone sensors for humidity, see Section 8.4.6., RH% Inside.

Humidistats, or inside relative humidity sensors, are used to monitor inside relative humidity in the zone. A dew point sensor, or the calculations from inside RH sensors and inside temperature sensors, is used to monitor dew point.

After the zone is setup to monitor dew point or the rel-ative humidity, the BCU will attempt to find the appropri-ate zone sensors. If zone sensors are not available, global sensors are used. If global sensors are not available, sensors within other zones are used. If no sensors at any of the lev-els are found, the BCU does not monitor humidity. There-fore, the BCU offers a fail-safe system for monitoring humidity. If a sensor fails, the BCU will try to use another sensor within the zone. If none are found, the BCU will seek sensors at the next higher level. This process contin-ues until all possibilities are exhausted.

After the BCU locates a usable humidity or dew point sensor, the measurement is compared to the zone set points for dehumidification. These set points are defined based on the type of sensors being used, and may be set to change ac-cording to the occupied or unoccupied status of the build-ing. Dehumidification set points determine if a stage of cool should be turned ON to dehumidify the zone.

If the humidity in the zone exceeds the dead band around the zone set point, the BCU will send a command to the ARTCs within the zone that dehumidification should begin (the dead band is a zone equally above and below the set point within which the humidity level is considered to be acceptable). The ARTCs determine if they are pro-grammed to perform dehumidification.

If a stand alone dehumidifier is being used, the dehu-midifier is activated immediately. If cool stages are being used, the first stage of cool will be activated after the spec-ified ON delay. Time delays are specified measurements of time the BCU must wait before activating or deactivating stages of cool.

After the first stage of cool is activated, the BCU will compare the humidity levels again after the specified ON delay. If the humidity level still exceeds or falls within the dead band, the BCU will call for the second stage of cool. Stages of cool will be activated until there are no more out-puts defined for cool, or until the humidity level falls below the dead band (see Figure 6-4).

The “Max Cools for Dehum” field specifies that cool stages will be used for dehumidification, and how many cool stages will be used. If this set point is set to the default of one, compressors two, three, and four will not be used during dehumidification. The minimum temperature for

using cools during dehumidification may also be defined. If the zone space temperature drops below this set point, the cools are locked off during dehumidification (see Section 8.4.6., RH% Inside).

When the control temperature falls below the dead band, the stand alone dehumidifier is shut off, or the last ac-tivated stage of cool will be turned off after the OFF delay. If the humidity level remains below the dead band, each of the remaining stages of cool will be deactivated (See Fig-ure 6-4).

The status of a specified zone may be monitored from the zone status screen. The screen displays the current zone humidity level (See Section 8.4.1., Zone Status).

6.6. Demand Control

Power companies supply power to consumers at a fixed rate per kilowatt hour until a pre-defined level of energy consumption is reached. This level is called the Demand Limit. When the demand limit is exceeded, the rate is great-ly increased as a penalty for high power demand by the consumer. Generally, once the demand limit is exceeded, the increased rate is charged for the remainder of the year.

To determine if a consumer has reached the demand limit, the power company arbitrarily monitors a consum-er’s energy consumption for a fixed period of time. That is, the consumer knows how long the monitoring will last, but

The “Max Cools for Dehum” number is only used when the zone temperature falls outside the cool tem-perature dead band.

Figure 6-4 - Humidity Dead Band

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.5.4. Load Shed Setup

Section 8.5.3. Demand Alarm Set Points

Section 8.5.8. Demand Status

Section 8.5.9. Load Shed Status

Page 48: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-6 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

does not know when it will take place. This monitoring pe-riod is called the Demand Window.

To help ensure that the demand limit is not reached, the BCU monitors the power being supplied and builds two separate calculated demand windows once a minute. Al-though the BCU is incapable of determining when the pow-er company will monitor demand, the use of these calculated windows allows the BCU to constantly make a reasonable estimate of when the demand limit may be ex-ceeded.

If the BCU determines that the current level of energy consumption is such that the demand limit is likely to be exceeded, the BCU begins to shut down—or shed—user-defined loads to reduce energy consumption. The BCU can monitor up to 4 seperate circuits. However, only circuit 1 is capable of load shedding. Circuits 2-4 are only available for demand monitoring. The following sections give a more in-depth analysis of demand monitoring.

6.6.1. Demand MonitoringThe BCU either monitors power using an analog kW

transducer, or monitors energy consumption using a digital watt-hour transducer. Once every minute—using data from the transducer—the BCU calculates average power over the previous minute and provides this information to the Demand Control algorithm.

6.6.2. Predicting Energy ConsumptionEach kilowatt (kW) reading is provided to the Demand

Control algorithm and is used to build two separate calcu-lated demand windows, which reasonably reflect the actual Demand Window used by the power company if monitor-ing were being performed at that moment in time.

Because the BCU cannot predict when the power com-pany will actually monitor for demand, the BCU must make two calculations, and combine these calculations with a specified demand monitoring duration (the demand window). This duration is supplied by the power company and is, therefore, a known constant.

To monitor demand, the BCU must build a calculated demand window that is equal in duration to the actual de-mand window the power company will use in sufficient time to make a prediction about likely future demand and enable load shedding.

To do this, the BCU builds a portion of the demand window using actual stored average power data. This por-tion is added to a predicted portion of the demand window which is based on the last stored kilowatt reading. By build-ing a calculated window that is a combination of actual and predicted consumption data, the BCU can make a reason-able estimate of demand in sufficient time to enable load shedding if the demand limit is likely to be exceeded. Fig-ure 6-5 shows how the calculated demand windows are built.

6.6.3. Load SheddingLoad shedding is the temporary reduction of the power

demand in a facility by shutting off specified loads. A load is any ARTC heat stage, cool stage, or I/O control output.

Once the BCU determines that load shedding must take place, it uses set points defined under Load Shed Setup (Section 8.5.4.) to determine which loads may be shed and in what order. Each load available for shed has a load shed priority. The load shed priority determines the order in which loads will be deactivated during a call for load shed.

The BCU takes the difference between the predicted demand and the demand set point to determine the amount (in kilowatts) that must be shed. By examining the kW re-quirement for each load in a priority level, the BCU finds an acceptable combination of sheddable loads to achieve the shed amount. Loads are shed at 20 second intervals. Loads may come out of shed if the predicted kW demand stays below the demand limit for two minutes. Loads are released from shed at 20 second intervals according to the defined priority. The shed cycle consists of determining what loads to shed, shedding them, and releasing them from shed.

Alarms and notices may be generated when the system exceeds the demand set points. The BCU can do several things once an alarm setpoint has been passed. The BCU can be programmed to send an alarm to the alarm log, close a set of contacts (alarm), send a message to the 485 alarm box, and/or dial out the alarm message. Notices are simply logged. High demand alarm set points may be defined to

Figure 6-5 - Calculated Demand Window

Page 49: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-7

initiate alarms when the set point is exceeded. Alarm de-lays may also be defined. When the system reaches the high demand alarm set point, the system will wait this defined period of time before activating the alarm or notice. Users may define alarm set points from the Demand Alarm screen (see Section 8.5.3.).

Users may view the current demand status from the De-mand Status screen (see Section 8.5.8.). Information dis-played on this screen includes the ON/OFF demand status, a summation of the times the BCU has been in demand, current demand set points, current power usage, peak pow-er usage, power use in the past hour, and power total for the day.

The current status for available kW, predicted kW, kW set points, and the required and requested kW for proper demand operation are displayed in the Load Shed Status screen (see Section 8.5.9.). This screen is also displayed if a particular output or ARTC is in shed.

6.7. Curtailment

Some power companies have curtailment programs that allow participating stores to disable user-defined loads dur-ing peak power times in return for discounts on utility rates.

If curtailment is available, the power company supplies a curtailment device which must be wired to an input on a 16AI, 8IO, or ARTC board. The device must then be de-fined at the Input Setup screen (Section 8.8.2.). In addition, one of the occupied alarm fields at the Input Alarms screen (Section 10.3.) must be set to “closed” or curtailment will never be enabled.

Users may assign curtailments to any of the stages with-in each ARTC. Two heat stages, two cool stages, the fan and two user-defined auxiliary outputs are available for curtailment. These options may be setup from the HVAC RTCs screen (see Section 8.5.5.). Sensor outputs are also available for curtailment. These user-defined outputs may be setup for curtailment from the Sensor Outputs screen (see Section 8.5.6.).

During a call from the local power company for curtail-ment, the BCU relays a contact closure to all loads assigned to curtailment. These loads will be turned off regardless of any other control settings. When power levels return to the normal operating condition, the power company will signal back to the loads and they will resume according to the de-fined settings. Contact the local power company for more information.

6.8. Economization

Economization is the process of allowing outside air into the Rooftop Unit as a stage of cool to conserve energy. The BCU performs economization with a digital or analog economizer defined by the user as an ARTC output (see Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup). This selection for each ARTC must agree with the physical equipment installed at the Roof Top Unit.

Unlike cooling and heating, the ARTC must receive a command from the BCU that conditions are acceptable for economization before the ARTC may determine if it can economize. If the ARTC is configured for economization (that is, an economizer is wired to the appropriate output and all set points have been defined), the ARTC opens the damper and economization begins. Economization ends when the BCU sends a second command indicating that conditions are no longer favorable for economization.

To control economization, the BCU monitors tempera-ture sensors, humidity sensors, dewpoint sensos, and read-ings from enthalpy switches. The measurements from these sensors determine which stage of economization should be activated within each zone. Users may define sensors at the Input Setup screen (see Section 8.8.2.).

The BCU will inventory the available sensors within each zone and use the first possible economization method of Table 6-1. The BCU continually selects the best econo-mization method for each zone based on the available sen-sors.

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.8.2. Input Setup

Section 10.3. Alarms Screen 1

Section 8.5.5. HVAC RTCs Shed Setup

Section 8.5.6. Sensor Outputs

Loads disabled during curtailment will remain off for a minimum of 15 minutes. This value may not be changed.

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

Section 8.8.1. Input Status

Section 8.4.11. RTC Status

Section 8.4.7. Miscellaneous Set Points

Section 8.4.13. Analog Output Setup

If a dew point set point is defined at the Miscella-neous Set Points screen, then the BCU will only econo-mize using the dew point set point. No other method will be used.

Page 50: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-8 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

The economization method used by each zone is dis-played by code number on the RTC Status screen (see Sec-tion 8.4.11.).

The economization strategy used can be manually spec-ified. A seperate summer and winter economization meth-od can be selected from the economization methods described in Table 6-1. If an economization method is se-lected and the BCU determines that the conditions for the manually selected economization are present, economiza-tion will take place according to the manually set strategy. If the BCU determines that the conditions are not condu-cive for the manual strategy, the BCU will determine the

best method for economization based on the current econ-omization strategy.

To determine if economization should be enabled, the BCU searches the appropriate zone for an enthalpy switch (Method 1). If that fails, economization may be controlled with dew point sensors (Method 2). If the BCU locates an outside dew point sensor, the current measured dew point is compared to the dew point set point. If the measured dew point falls below the set point, economization is activated within the specified zone. Users may define the dew point set point from the Miscellaneous Set Points screen (see Section 8.4.7.). If a dew point set point is defined and an enthalpy switch is not defined in the zone, the BCU will only economize based on method 2; no other methods in Table 6-1 will be used. Economization is disabled when the outside dew point exceeds the dew point set point by two degrees.

If this method fails, economization is controlled by the calculated outside and inside enthalpy (Method 3). If the corresponding input sensors are found, the BCU takes the temperature and humidity measurements from the input sensors, calculates outside enthalpy, and compares this val-ue to the calculated inside enthalpy. If the outside enthalpy is less than the inside enthalpy, economization is activated within the specified zone.

The BCU then searches for a global enthalpy switch (Method 4). When a global enthalpy switch is not located, a global enthalpy switch from another zone is used (Meth-od 5).

The BCU next offers a fail-safe dew point method that compares the outside temperature with the dew point set point if the dew point sensor is not found (Method 7). The ARTC will activate economization within each zone based on the results from the economization methods chosen by the BCU. If communication with the BCU is lost, the ARTC will enable or disable economization by comparing inside and outside temperature if an outside temperature sensor is connected to the ARTC.

The BCU then tries to enable economization based on the inside and outside temperatures (Method 8). If the out-side temperature is less than the inside temperature, econo-mization is activated within the specified zone. Since the BCU should always be able to locate temperature sensors (an ARTC cannot control an RTU without them), this method is the default method if no other sensors are found.

When economization is activated in a zone using a dig-ital economizer, the economizer damper will open 100%. Economization is then disabled according to space temper-ature set points. When a digital economizer is used, it is considered the first stage of cool when economization is ac-tivated.

Code Method Description

0 Econ Disabled Economizer not defined

1 Enthalpy Switch in Zone

All RTCs in a defined zone will use the en-thalpy switch

2 Dew Point Set Point Outside dew point com-pared to set point

3 Calc Enthalpy Zone Compare calculated outside enthalpy, using outside RH% and out-side temp, to calculated inside enthalpy, using inside RH% at the same zone and inside temp. If a global humidity sensor is used, the sensor must be defined as EcnIRH5V at the I/O Control Input Setup Screen (see Section 8.8.2.)

4 Enthalpy Switch Global All RTUs in the system use the enthalpy switch

5 Enthalpy Switch at RTC A single RTC is con-nected to the enthalpy switch

7 Dew Point Fail-Safe Compare outside temp to dew point set point

8 Temp/Temp Compari-son

Compare inside temp to outside temp

9 Econ not possible Error condition: Econ enabled but not enough valid sensors found

Table 6-1 - Economization Methods

Comparing outside temperature to a dew point set point is a poor substitute for actual dew point readings, and is only supplied as a fail-safe. Users should ensure that proper humidity or dew point sensors are available.

If an outside temperature sensor is not connected to a particular ARTC, that ARTC is not capable of econo-mization during network communication loss.

Page 51: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-9

When economization is activated in a zone using an an-alog economizer, the economizer will modulate first based on the mixed air temperature. If a mixed air temperature sensor is not found, the economizer will modulate based on the supply air temperature. These control temperatures are compared to the analog economization temperature set point defined from the RTC Setup screen (See Section 8.4.12.).

The analog economizer damper will proportionally modulate based on the throttling range which is fixed at 10° F around the analog economization temperature set point. When the mixed air or supply air temperature is at the bot-tom of the throttling range, the economizer damper will modulate closed or the damper will modulate to its mini-mum position. When the air temperature is at the top of the throttling range, the economizer damper will modulate open 100%. For example, if the analog economization tem-perature set point is 60° F, the economizer damper will open 25% when the control temperature is 57.5° F and 75% when the control temperature is 62.5° F (See Figure 6-6).

If the air temperature remains in the throttling range, the damper will continue to modulate open and closed ac-cording to the placement within the range. If the air temper-ature exceeds the throttling range, the damper will remain open 100%. If the air temperature falls below the throttling range, the damper will close to the minimum position. When the space temperature in the zone is below the cool dead band (that is, the temperature level in the zone is sat-isfactory), the economizer damper closes to the minimum position.

The ARTC modulates the damper by sending the ap-propriate voltage to the analog economizer. Voltage ranges may be defined when the economizer is defined as an ana-log output in the ARTC. By default, the output will be de-fined 0-10 V DC. Users may modify this range from the Analog Outputs screen (see Section 8.4.13.). Voltages

should be defined based on the manufacturer’s specifica-tions for the damper motor. The ARTC will automatically send the appropriate voltage to the economizer according to the desired position of the damper.

Mechanical cool stages can be locked out through a user-defined set point. Supply Temp Cool Lockout allows an economizer to condition an area without a compressor stage coming on when the space temperature hasn’t been met within the cool on-delay period. To determine if con-ditions are conducive for economization without mechani-cal cools, the BCU will look at the supply air temperature to see if the temperature is below the supply air set point. If it is, economization will take place.

The user can prevent additional compressors from stag-ing on by setting a lockout throttling range. If the lockout throttling range is used and the BCU determines that the supply air temperature is below the supply air set point plus half of the user defined throttling range, no additional com-pressors will be allowed to stage on because the supply temperature is within the modulating range of the econo-mizer.

Once the supply temperature rises above the lockout setpoint plus half of the throttling range, additional com-pressors may come on if the BCU calls for them.

Economization is disabled if the space temperature ris-es above the space temperature dead band (dead band is the zone equally above and below the set point within which the temperature level is considered to be acceptable). If the space temperature rises above the upper boundary of the dead band, economization is disabled and the first stage of mechanical cooling is activated after the ON delay. Time delays are specified measurements of time the BCU must wait before activating or deactivating a stage of cool. For more information about stages of cool see Section 6.4., Cooling.

6.9. Makeup Air

Makeup air is a method of maintaining positive pres-sure in a controlled space using rooftop unit economizers and fans.

The use of RTU economizers and fans to provide enough outside air to maintain positive pressure within a building, or to overcome the negative pressure affects of building exhaust fans, has a wide degree of variability. For this reason, the BCU makeup air strategy is configured

Figure 6-6 - Analog Economization Throttling Range

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.4.15. Supply Temp Cool Lockout

Section 8.6.1. Schedule Setup

Section 8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

Page 52: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-10 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

completely with user-defined set points, and makes no pre-dictions or assumptions about when or how makeup air should be enabled.

To setup a makeup air strategy, the user must provide the following information:

1. The minimum number ARTCs to be used for make-up air.

2. How the strategy will be enabled: schedule, digital input, or always.

3. A schedule number (if a schedule is used) that de-fines the on and off times for makeup air.

4. The minimum outside air temperature at which makeup air may be enabled.

5. The maximum outside air temperature at which makeup air may be enabled.

6. The amount to offset the dampers of running RTUs to compensate for those not running.

7. The maximum time an RTU may be in makeup mode.

8. Whether a specific ARTC is available for makeup mode.

9. Whether the makeup air strategy will look at the OAT before engaging makeup air.

The makeup air application is designed to use RTUs that are already on for other purposes so that units are not brought on for the sole purpose of providing makeup air. However, in the unlikely event no RTUs are running when makeup air is enabled, the minimum required number of RTUs will be activated. Further, the makeup air strategy is configured using the number of ARTCs that are designated for makeup air strategy participation. If, when makeup air is enabled by the BCU, only a partial number of the desig-nated RTUs are running, the makeup air strategy adjusts the running RTU dampers by a calculated amount to com-pensate for those designated units that are not running.

For example, if 10 RTUs have been designated for makeup air; the damper offset is one percent; and, on a call for makeup air, five RTUs are not running the remaining RTUs that are running will increase their damper position by five percent (five units x one percent). The damper off-set is defined at the Makeup Air screen (see Section 8.4.15.).

ARTCs are selected by sequentially rotating through all available controllers. Under normal conditions, the ARTC will eventually time out based on the makeup override time and the next ARTC in the sequence will be activated. This will distribute fan run times equally among the participat-ing controllers. Makeup override times and minimum run-ning ARTC fans may be defined from the Makeup air screen (see Section 8.4.15.).

The makeup air application may be enabled by a sched-ule, by a digital input, or it may be enabled at all times. Us-ers may choose from all 56 available schedules defined at the Schedule Setup screen (see Section 8.4.15.). If digital inputs are connected, an input must be defined as makeup air. Inputs may be defined at the RTC I/O Setup screen (see Section 8.4.12.).

Regardless of whether makeup air is enabled using a schedule, digital input, or always enabled, the outside air temperature determines if makeup air actually begins. The minimum outside air temperature and the maximum out-side air temperature at which the makeup air application will be enabled are defined at the Makeup Air screen (See Section 8.4.15.).

6.9.1. OAT DisableThe Makeup air strategy may be disabled or modified

when the outside air temperature is too high or too low. Us-ers may specify a range of temperatures within which makeup air may be enabled. When the outside air is above or below this range of temperatures, either of three strate-gies may be employed:

1. Disable-makeup air is disabled

2. MUA Fans ON-the disabled fans come on for makeup air, but the Damper offset is set to zero

3. MUA Fans On-Strategy 2 is active only when the building is occupied. When unoccupied, disable makeup air

6.10. Input/Output Control

Related Screen Descriptions

Section 8.8.7. Input Set Points

Section 8.8.1. Input Status

Section 8.8.5. Adjustment

Section 8.8.3. Combiner

Section 8.8.8. Input Overrides

Section 10.3. Alarms Screen 1

Section 8.8.12. Logic Screen

Section 8.8.16. Output Demand

Section 8.8.14. OTMR Setup

Section 8.4.17. RTC Bypass

Section 8.8.15. Output Proof

Section 8.4.13. Analog Output Setup

Page 53: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-11

Input/Output or I/O Control is a method of controlling a building using user-configured modules that both inter-pret and manipulate data from input components, and mon-itor and control mechanical equipment.

The traditional approach to component control is through the use of applications. Applications are boiler-plate programs that provide the user with a fill-in-the-blank method of controlling common building functions.

Standard HVAC, Demand, and Schedule Control func-tions still use the applications approach. These common control functions require the ability to simultaneously con-trol many components with similar or different set points.

While applications are a quick, easy-to-understand way to control conditions within a building, they do suffer from a lack of flexibility. Many of today’s building control envi-ronments require a greater degree of latitude that allows for complex overriding and scheduling features not available with the traditional applications approach.

I/O Control, while sacrificing the boilerplate ease of ap-plications, provides the user with the ability to completely customize control of mechanical components.

6.10.1. Cells and ModulesI/O Control is best defined as the process of reading a

sensor value; comparing the value to a set of user-defined set points; and activating or deactivating a load based on the comparison. Unfortunately, control of large buildings requires multiple layers of set points that have different pri-orities and control many loads.

To simplify this complex array of set points, the BCU uses the concept of cells and modules. A Cell is a group of set points that share a common function or priority such as Override or Proof set points. These similar set points are combined into a cell because the BCU must examine those set points as a group and provide a single resultant value. The number of cells used within the BCU is fixed and com-prises the various controlling features of the BCU such as Alarming, Logging, Overrides, Bypassing, etc. In addition, the arrangement of the cells may not be changed. The user may choose to use certain cells and not others, but may not add, delete, or rearrange features in the BCU.

Various cells that share a common bond such as manip-ulating a sensor value, or providing a control command to a physical relay are grouped together within a Module. A module may be used alone or combined with other mod-ules. Unlike cells, modules may be connected in many dif-ferent ways depending on the needs of the user.

Figure 6-7 provides a simple, graphic representation of the relationship between set points, cells, and modules. Several set points may be depicted as the various shapes shown in group one. Next, each shape may be used to sep-arate the set points into cells as shown in the second group.

Finally, the cells may be separated by color to create mod-ules as in the third group.

The BCU uses two kinds of modules: Sensor Input Modules and Digital Output Modules. In general, the cells grouped within the Input Control Module are those cells that are necessary to assemble a final control value that will be used to control an output. Conversely, the cells grouped within the Digital Output Module are those cells that con-trol the way the output is activated based on current sched-ules, bypasses, and interaction with multiple sensors.

Within the BCU I/O Control section, each screen is ac-tually a specific cell, or group of set points, that falls within either the input or output control module. By tying each in-put or output screen together through the use of the input or output number field, a module is built. A control strategy is built when the input and output modules are combined to control a component, issue an alarm, or log a value based on the value received and interpreted by the input module.

Up to 48 separate Sensor Input Modules and 48 sepa-rate Digital Output Modules may be configured within the BCU. Although the user may not change which cells fall within the two types of modules, each module has the flex-ibility to be configured many different ways.

It is important to note, however, that modules and cells are not tangible entities, but a method of software program-ming that allows the BCU to interpret data and control components in a structured, prioritized fashion. Therefore, multiple screens within the BCU may need to be accessed before a cell or module is complete.

In its simplest form, I/O control is the linking of a sen-sor to an input module that is linked to an output module that is linked to a piece of equipment. However, the flexi-bility of I/O control allows very complex combinations of modules to produce results that are based on multiple fac-tors. Figure 6-8 shows a simple relationship between input

Figure 6-7 - Relationship Between Set Points, Cells, and Modules

Page 54: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-12 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

and output modules, and the various required hardware and user inputs.

Although it is easiest to display the transfer of data be-tween cells and modules as arrows, it is more accurate to

say that a module or cell is actually designed to retrieve data supplied by a sensor, or other cell or module.

In fact, cells and modules work much the same way as cells in current spreadsheet programs such as ExcelTM or Lotus 1-2-3TM. If a user wishes to combine the value of cells A3 and B4 into a single value in cell J6, the equation in J6 could be A3 + B4. The user cannot create some equa-tion in either cell A3 or B4 that transfers a value to J6.

6.10.1.1. Sensor Input Module

General Description

The primary purpose of the Sensor Input Module is to read one or more sensor and/or switch values, log the data, and convert the value to something usable inside the BCU. The Sensor Input Module is shown in Figure 6-9.

Inputs

Auxiliary Inputs

The Sensor Input Module may be combined with up to three auxiliary inputs. These input values are the final ana-log or digital control values issued by other Sensor Input Modules.

Occupancy Input

The Sensor Input Module requires an occupancy input which may be provided by any of five command types:

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the in-

teraction between the Hardware Interface, Combin-er, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is generated based on a digi-tal or analog signal generated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the in-teraction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Combiner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the com-

Figure 6-8 - Simple I/O Control Using Modules

Figure 6-9 - Sensor Input Module

Page 55: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-13

parison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sen-sor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Control in the BCU.

The occupancy input is defined at the Input Set Points screen as shown in Figure 6-10.

Cells

Hardware Interface

To interpret data from a sensor properly, the BCU must have a complete description of the sensor and where it is lo-cated. Each Sensor Input Module has a single Hardware In-terface cell to link the module to a sensor or switch. Definition of the sensor or switch is accomplished using three separate screens as shown in Figure 6-11. In general, definition of the Input Setup Screen is sufficient to com-plete identification of the sensor or switch.

Although standard configurations will generally link the input module to an actual sensor or switch, the Sensor Input Module may be configured as a virtual input module. That is, the module can combine various other input mod-

ules and occupancy data, and calculate control values with-out being connected to a sensor or switch.

Alarm sequences are available for all input types de-fined in I/O Control. However, some input types require an alarm sequence in order to function properly. These input types are ShutDown, Lights-On, Curtail. If any of these in-put types are used in I/O Control, an associated alarm se-quence must be defined at Alarm screen 1 (see Section 10.3.).

Most sensors connected to an input communication board provide data to a specific Sensor Input Module. Only the specified module uses the data received from the con-nected sensor. Global sensor readings are applicable to all areas controlled by the BCU. Global input sensors are used to monitor BCU functions such as lights and outside air and are also used when the BCU cannot find the appropriate sensors for a specified area.

If the Hardware Interface cell is connected to a sensor, the cell may send up to three separate signals to other cells in the Sensor Input Module. An analog or digital control value signal is sent to the Combiner cell where it is com-bined with other Sensor Input values. If the cell is config-ured as an override, a digital pulse signal is sent directly to the Override cell for both Override On and Override Cancel so that the Override cell may determine if a Sensor Input Command digital signal should be sent when an override action is taken.

Combiner

I/O Control provides a method of combining the control values of several modules together to produce a final con-trol value.

The Combiner cell receives an analog or digital signal from the Hardware Interface cell and combines this value with the analog or digital Sensor Input Value of up to three other Sensor Input Modules. These additional modules are designated as either AUX 1, AUX 2, or AUX 3. When oth-er modules are combined within the combiner cell, the BCU reads the Sensor Input values from the other modules and makes a comparison based on the logic type selected at the Combiner screen (Figure 6-12).

Figure 6-10 - Input Set Points Screen

Figure 6-11 - Hardware Interface Definition Screens

When a contact closure is detected within an input defined as ShutDown, Lights-On, or Curtailment, the BCU activates these override functions regardless of any other control settings.

Figure 6-12 - Input Combiner Screen

Page 56: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-14 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

After the control values have been combined, the Com-biner cell sends an analog or digital signal to the Logging, Mode, and Process Alarm cells; and issues a final value called the Sensor Input Value.

Filter

The filter can be used to limit the rate of change of the combiner’s output before the output becomes an input for another cell. The filter can be used to modify inputs that will go to the Process Alarm cell, Sensor Input, Mode, or Logging cell.

Mode

The Mode cell links cut-in and cut-out set point infor-mation with an occupancy signal supplied through the Oc-cupancy Input, and the analog or digital signal sent by the Combiner cell. The function of the Mode cell is to combine occupancy information with a signal sent by single or mul-tiple sensors, and a signal—set by either schedule or switch—which indicates the current occupancy mode. The Input Set Point screen used to define the Mode cell is shown in Figure 6-10.

After these signals have been combined, the Mode cell sends a digital signal to the Override cell.

Override

The Override cell provides a method of overriding the signal sent by the Mode cell. The Input Overrides screen is used for overriding the Sensor Input Module, and is shown in Figure 6-14.

If the Hardware Interface cell is configured as an over-ride, two digital pulse signals (Override On and Override Cancel) are sent to the Override cell directly, and no other cells in the Sensor Input Module are used.

After either a command is issued through the Input Overrides screen, or a digital pulse signal is received from

the Hardware Interface cell, the Override cell issues a final digital value called the Sensor Input Command.

Process Alarm

The Process Alarm cell determines the occupancy mode using the occupancy signal supplied through the Oc-cupancy Input. The cell issues the Sensor Input Alarm, a fi-nal digital signal, if the control value sent by the Combiner cell falls outside of the occupied and unoccupied alarm val-ues defined using the Input Alarms screen shown in Figure 6-15.

Logging

The Logging cell receives the digital signal from the combiner cell and logs the value.

6.10.1.2. Digital Output Module

General Description

The primary purpose of the Digital Output Module is to combine internal BCU values into a single value fed to a physical relay. The Digital Output Module is shown in Fig-ure 6-16.

Figure 6-13-Filter Screen

Issuing an override command in the Override cell only affects the sensor input command of the Sensor In-put Module. To fully bypass the condition of a relay, the Bypass cell must be used. See Digital Output Module.

Figure 6-14 - Input Overrides Screen

Figure 6-15 - Input Alarms Screens

Page 57: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-15

Inputs

Shed Condition

The Shed Condition input is a digital value issued by the demand control algorithm that tells the Demand Inter-face cell that load shedding should begin. This value is used in conjunction with the Demand Disable input and the Maximum and Minimum Sensor Values defined in the De-mand Interface cell to determine if a load will be shed.

Demand Disable

The Demand Disable input is an analog value issued as the Sensor Input Value of a Sensor Input Module and re-ceived by the Demand Interface cell. If the Demand Dis-able input value falls inside of defined values within the Demand Interface cell, the Demand Interface cell allows load shedding to occur.

Schedule

The Digital Output Module may use a schedule input which may be provided by any of five command types:

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the in-teraction between the Hardware Interface, Combin-

er, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is generated based on a digi-tal or analog signal generated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the in-teraction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Logic, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the com-parison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sen-sor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Control in the BCU.

The Schedule input is defined at the Input Set Points screen as shown in Figure 6-10.

Figure 6-16 - Digital Output Module

Page 58: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

6-16 • Software Overview 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Minimum On/Off

The Minimum On/Off cell can be used in conjunction with the Schedule cell to determine the maximum and min-imum time that an input or output will be on or off. The state of the input/output can also be displayed.

Proof

The Digital Output Module issues a command as a re-sult of comparing a control value established within the output module with a digital value called the Proof Input. This input may be provided by any of the command types listed under Schedule on page 15.

Command Inputs

The Digital Output Module is designed to receive up to four separate command inputs. These inputs may be any of the command types listed under Schedule on page 15.

Cells

Logic

The Logic cell combines up to four digital value Com-mand Inputs using the logic type designated at the Output Setup Logic screen (Figure 6-18). The Logic cell then sends a single digital control value to the Schedule Inter-face cell.

Schedule Interface

The Schedule Interface cell adds an additional combi-nation feature, allowing the result of the Logic cell to be combined with a single digital value called the Schedule In-put. Although this input will generally be the result of a schedule created under Schedule Control, it may be any of the five command inputs described under Schedule on page 15. The Schedule input and digital control value supplied by the Logic cell are combined using the method defined at the Output Setup Logic screen (Figure 6-18). The Sched-ule Interface cell then sends a digital control value to the Demand Interface cell.

Demand Interface

The Demand Interface cell receives the digital control value from the Schedule Interface cell and determines if the signal should be transferred to the Timer cell unchanged, or if the signal should be changed to initiate load shedding.

Although the Demand Control algorithm monitors power, determines when the Demand Limit is likely to be exceeded, and chooses which loads to shed (see Section 6.6., Demand Control), it is the Demand Interface cell that allows a load tied to a Digital Output Module to be shed.

When the Demand Limit is likely to be exceeded, the Demand Control algorithm sends a shed command to the Demand Interface Cell. This command may not be altered by the BCU user. The Demand Interface Cell then com-pares the sensor input value (usually from a temperature sensor) to the Maximum and Minimum Sensor Values en-tered at the Output Demand Set Points screen (Figure 6-19). If the sensor input value is within this range, and the minimum non-shed time has been exceeded, the Demand Interface cell will allow load shedding to begin. The de-mand interface cell then sends the applicable digital control value to the Timer cell.

Timer

The Timer cell uses the digital value sent by the De-mand Interface cell to create a momentary start or momen-tary stop signal to drive a relay output. The Output Timer Type is specified at the OTMR Setup Screen (Figure 6-20) as either Momentary Start or Momentary Stop. If Momen-tary Start is selected, the timer cell waits until an ON value is received from the Demand Interface cell and pulses a digital ON value for the duration specified using the Output Timer Default field. The pulse will end when the designat-ed duration is reached regardless of whether the value sent by the Demand Interface cell has changed.

If Momentary Stop is selected, the timer cell waits until an OFF value is received from the Demand Interface cell and pulses a digital ON value for the duration specified us-

Figure 6-17

Figure 6-18 - Output Setup Logic Screen

MIN ON/OFF (OUTPUT01 OUTPUT-01 ) 12:00

Min On Time :000 min

Min Off Time:000 min

Input :NONE

Output :OFF

State :Normal

=PREV =SET 0=MENU =NEXT

Figure 6-19 - Output Demand Set Points Screen

Figure 6-20 - OTMR Setup Screen

Page 59: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Software Overview • 6-17

ing the Output Timer Default field. The pulse will end when the designated duration is reached regardless of whether the value sent by the Demand Interface cell has changed. If the OTMR screen is not activated, the Timer cell leaves the value sent by the Demand Interface cell un-changed and transfers it to the Bypass cell.

Bypass

The Bypass cell receives a digital control value from the Timer cell and either issues the value unchanged as a Digital Output Command, and sends a digital control value to the Proof cell, or it changes the value based on the com-mand issued by the user at the Output Bypass screen (Fig-ure 6-21). The Bypass condition remains in effect for the duration specified in the Bypass Timer Default field if the bypass is timed, or until the condition is changed is the by-pass is fixed.

Proof

In general, the Proof cell is used to determine if a com-ponent instructed to turn on using I/O Control has turned on. The Proof cell compares the digital value issued by the Bypass cell and the Proof Input value. The Proof Input val-ue is defined at the Output Proofs Screen (Figure 6-22). If the digital value issued by the Bypass cell is ON and the Proof Input value is OFF, the Proof cell issues digital ON value as the Proof Fail Command after the delay specified in the Proof Delay field. In all other cases, the Proof cell is-sues a digital OFF value as the Proof Fail Command.

Hardware Interface

In most cases, a Digital Output Module is used to con-trol a physical relay, although the results of the module may simply be fed into another input or output module without controlling anything. If the module is to control a relay, the Hardware Interface cell must be defined using the Output Setup Screen (Figure 6-23). Once defined, the Hardware

Interface screen directs the Digital Output Command to the designated output relay.

Figure 6-21 - Output Bypass Screen

Figure 6-22 - Output Proofs Screen

Figure 6-23 - Output Setup Screen

Page 60: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 61: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Configuration Guide • 7-1

7 System Configuration Guide

This outline (Section 7.1.–Section 7.7.) can be used for the general configuration of a BCU system. The System Configuration Guide presents the steps for general configuration of a BCU in a chronological order. Some steps of this guide can be skipped if the BCU is not to perform the functions defined. Before attempting to program the BCU, decide what functions the BCU will perform and then identify what sections are pertinent to the configuration.

7.1. Define Zones and HVAC SetpointsZone Setpoints-Description of how to configure a zone within the BCU.

1. Assign RTC Boards to a Zone—Section 8.4.2.

2. Determine Control Method—Section 8.4.3.

3. Assign a Schedule to a Zone—Section 8.4.4.

4. Define Temperature Setpoints by Zone—Section 8.4.5.

5. Define Relative Humidity Setpoints by Zone—Section 8.4.6.

6. Define Miscellaneous Setpoints by Zone—Section 8.4.7.

7. Define Alarm Setpoints for the Zone—Section 8.4.8.

HVAC Setup (RTC Setup)-Description of how to configure HVAC including RTC setup.

1. RTC I/O Setup—Section 8.4.12.

2. Define Analog Output for RTC—Section 8.4.13.

3. Setup RTCs—Section 8.4.14.

4. Setup Makeup Air—Section 8.4.16.

7.2. Define SchedulesScheduling-Describes how to set schedules. Schedules can be used for HVAC, lighting, and other output control.

1. Define a Standard Week—Section 8.6.6.

2. Define a Holiday Schedule—Section 8.6.4.

3. Define Alternate Week Schedules—Section 8.6.5.

4. Activate Holiday Schedules by Date—Section 8.6.8.

5. Activate Alternate Week Schedules by Date—Section 8.6.9.

7.3. Define InputsInputs-Inputs are what the BCU uses to gather information about what it is controlling.

1. Setup Sensor—Section 8.8.2.

2. Define Input Setpoints—Section 8.8.7.

Page 62: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

7-2 • System Configuration Guide 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

7.4. Define OutputsOutputs-The BCU controls devices through outputs. Outputs can be either digital or analog.

Digital-Digital outputs are either on or off.

1. Output Setup—Section 8.8.11.

2. Output Status—Section 8.8.10.

Analog-Analog outputs can vary their output.

1. Output Setup—Section 8.4.13.

7.5. Setup Demand MonitoringDemand Monitoring-The BCU can both control and monitor demand. The BCU will monitor demandthrough inputs and control demand by shedding equipment if it feels a predefined setpoint will be reached.

1. Set Demand Set Points—Section 8.5.2.

2. Set Output Demand—Section 8.8.16.

3. Set Shed Set Points for HVAC—Section 8.4.10.

4. Define kW Requirements for ARTCs—Section 8.8.6.

5. Designate Digital Output Modules for Load Shed—Section 8.8.11.

7.6. Check System Status ScreensStatus Screens-Status Screens give the user system information.

1. Zone Status—Section 8.4.1.

2. Demand Status—Section 8.5.8.

3. RTC Status—Section 8.4.11.

4. Load Shed Status—Section 8.5.9.

5. Input Status—Section 8.8.1.

6. Output Status—Section 8.8.10.

7. On-line Status of the Host Network—Section 8.10.5.

8. On-line Status of the Board Network—Section 8.10.9.

7.7. If It Is Necessary To Bypass a System SettingBypass-Bypass screens allow the user to circumvent system settings. Bypasses should only be used for temporary system control.

1. Override a Schedule—Section 8.6.2.-Section 8.6.3.

2. Output Bypass—Section 8.8.17.

3. RTC Bypass—Section 8.4.17.

4. Input Overrides—Section 8.8.8.

Page 63: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-1

8 System Setup

Sections 8-10 provide a system description for every screen programmed into the BCU. With over 150 accessi-ble screens, navigation through the BCU can be complex. The following descriptions provide information necessary to access any screen, what data entries are required, how those data are entered, what data ranges are acceptable for each field, and any default settings when applicable. The screens and instructions were prepared for BCU software versions 2.0 and above; therefore, some of these instruc-tions may not apply to earlier software versions.

An overall map of the BCU screens is provided at the back of this manual.

To help ease the use of this section, the general layout of the section and the icons used are described below.

Page Layout

A main heading entry is provided for each screen found in the BCU. For Menu Screens such as the Main or HVAC Control menu screens, the screen graphic is accompanied by a quick reference table that provides page numbers for the options listed at that menu screen.

In addition to the screen graphic, key graphics are pro-vided that show the exact key sequence necessary to access a particular screen. Although most of these buttons are self-explanatory, several require further discussion.

- Data Entry. The Data Entry button means that data, such as circuit numbers, may be required before

pressing the button. These data vary from screen to screen and a description of the data is provided when nec-essary.

2 - Follow-On Keystroke. When a subscripted num-ber appears next to a key graphic, it means that the key should be pressed that number of times to reach the desired

screen. In some instances, a subscripted number may be

followed by a + symbol: 2+. This means that the key may need to be pressed an additional time to reach the de-sired screen.

Help Prompt Lines

Most BCU screens contain a help prompt line at the bottom of the screen that provides the user with informa-tion about navigation and field data ranges. Within this sec-tion, the help prompt line shown is always the line that is displayed when the cursor is off the screen. Generally, the prompt line changes when the cursor is moved to a data en-try field.

Data Fields

Data fields where entry is required by the BCU user are shaded on the screen graphics.

Data Ranges and Default Settings

Data ranges for data fields—the information supplied in the help prompt lines—are displayed in brackets and bold type [-99° – 99°] either at the heading for the partic-ular field description, or—when a heading does not exist—within the body of the description. Suggested or default values for a particular entry are always shown in brackets and bold type immediately following the data range [-99° – 99°] [-15.5] .

Alternate Screen Entries

Alternate screens are displayed for Standard and Case Control Circuit setup as well as for the multiple case con-trol types. If a screen description does not match the screen on the BCU front panel, ensure that the description is not for a different hardware or setup function.

Screen Messages

If a field is displaying the message "NDF", a sensor or setpoint has not been defined. The message "NON" indi-cates that the BEC is not detecting a sensor reading.

:

#ENT

Page 64: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-2 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.1. Default Status Screens

The Default Status screens may be accessed without logging into the system. After the unit is turned on, the unit goes through a software check, then the primary default screen is displayed. Status screens display the most current information about a specified unit within the BCU. Status screens make it easy to quickly determine the BCU’s oper-ational status. Problems within the BCU are easily recog-nized in these screens. There are two default status screens: the RTC Status screen and the Zone Status screen. The RTC Status screen is the unit's primary default screen and is displayed after initial start-up. To switch between the two status screens, press the Blue key and X. No modifica-tions may be made to system settings at status screens.

RTC Status Screen

The RTC Status screen displays the current status of the ARTCs within the network. The user may view if a board is off-line, in alarm, in load shedding, or if the inputs and outputs connected to the ARTC are currently ON or OFF. This screen will also indicate if the BCU is being accessed by a hand-held terminal. The following fields display dis-play the status of various elements in the BCU system:

1. << OFFLINE >>—The current RTC board is offline. If the board is on-line, the current readings of the connected inputs and outputs will be displayed in the other fields.

2. FAN—The fan can be "ON", off–"..", by-passed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

3. HT1—This field will show the first stage of heat as being "ON", off–"..", bypassed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

4. HT2—This field will show the second stage of heat as being "ON", off–"..", bypassed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

5. CL1—This field will show the first stage of cooling as being "ON", off–"..", bypassed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

6. CL2—This field will show the second stage of cooling as being "ON", off–"..", bypassed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

7. AX1—This user defined auxillary output

8. AX2—This second user defined auxillary out-put

9. ECO—The EC field shows what type of economization is occuring. Section 8.4.7., Miscellaneous Set Points, describes EC1–EC8 in greater detail. EC9 and EC0 are only displayed at the RTC Status screen.

"EC1"–Sensor Availability

"EC2"–Local Enthalpy Switch

"EC3"–Dew Point Setpoint

"EC4"–Enthalpy Calculation

"EC5"–Global Enthalpy Switch

"EC6"–Other Zone Enthalpy Switch

"EC7"–Dew Point FailSafe

"EC8"–Compare Temp/Temp

"EC9"–Economization Lockout–Econo-mization is locked out based on the Econ Lockout Temp setting.

"EC0"–Economization Not Possible–A temperature or dewpoint sensor is bad and the BCU will not attempt to econo-mize.

Economization will be displayed either "ON" or ".." (off) below the economization type.

10. DEH—Dehumidification will be "ON", off–"..", bypassed on–"*ON", or bypassed off–"*..".

11. OCC—Occupancy will be either "ON" or ".." (off).

12. SPC—The current space temperature reading will be displayed in this field.

13. SUPLY—The current supply air temperature reading will be displayed in this field.

14. CCA—This field displays the proofs for com-

RTC Status Screen

Zone Status Screen

ZONE00 STAT (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00 FAN HT1 HT2 CL1 CL2 AX1 AX2 EC0 DEH OCC

SPC(00-00) SUPLY RETRN CCA AUX-01 AUX-02

ENT=LogOn =+RTC BCU1 2.10A1

<< OFFLINE >> .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. ..

.... .... .... ... ..... .....

Page 65: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-3

pressors one and two and the air flow switch if used. Compressor one is identified by the first "C", compressor two is identified by the second "C", and the "A" identifies the air flow switch. A "." under one of the letters in-dicates that it is off. A "1" under one of the letters indicates an on status.

15. AUX-01—This field can be used to display the value of a user defined auxillary input.

16. AUX-01—This field can be used to display the value of a user defined auxillary input.

Zone Status Screen

The Zone Status screen displays information on indi-vidual RTCs within a zone. The outside field displays the current outside temperature reading if one is defined. The RTCs field displays the total number of RTCs within a

zone with each RTC listed below it. The RTC-Location field displays the corresponding name of all RTCs within a zone. The Space field gives the actual corresponding space temperature for each RTC. Control field will display the temperature that the RTC is trying to reach. This tempera-ture is defined by the type of temperature control that is be-ing used for the zone. The Humid field will display the current humidity reading within the zone.

At the bottom of the screen there is a set of two letters. The first letter describes whether the zone is currently set to occupied "O" or unoccupied "U". The next letter de-scribes what season the controller is looking at. If the con-troller believes that it is summer, an "S" will be displayed. If the controller believes that it is winter, a "W" will be dis-played. Under each of the two letter fields, the setpoint for each will be displayed if it is set.

8.2. Log On

The BCU system requires a password for users to enter into and modify the system. This ensures security of system settings. Passwords also determine the access level of the user. Table 8-1 describes each password level.

New passwords may be added at the BCU System Set-up screen (see Section 8.9.4.).

To log on to the system, enter the appropriate password in the Password field and press enter.

BCU LOGON 03/23/95 12:00 Password: Password required to change setpoints. Press ENT for viewing only.

ENTER PASSWORD

LevelDefault

Password Actions Allowed

1 100 • View System Settings

• Acknowledge and Reset Alarms

2 200 Level 100, plus

• Adjust Set Points

• Configure 16AI Boards

3 300 Level 200, plus

• Perform Setup Functions

• Perform Network Settings Changes

4 400 Full Access

Table 8-1 - Password Levels and Available Tasks

Page 66: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-4 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.3. Main Menu

8.4. HVAC Control Menu

8.4.1. Zone Status

The Zone Status screen displays the current status of the zones established in the system. A zone is a grouping of one or more rooftop units having identical set points. The Zone Status screen also displays the number of ARTCs and the location of each ARTC within a zone. Other informa-tion displayed on this screen includes the current space and set point temperatures for the zone, the current outside tem-perature, and the current humidity level in the zone. Active heating and cooling set points for the zone are displayed in the lower right hand corner of the screen.

MAIN MENU 12:00 1-HVAC Control 6-BCU Sys Setup 2-Demand Control 7-BCU Config 3-Schedule Control 8-BCU Graphs 4-I/O Control 9-BCU Alarms 5-Alarm Control ENT-Log Off

SELECT NUMBER

Item Description Page

1 HVAC Control 8-4

2 Demand Control 8-16

3 Schedule Control 8-20

4 I/O Control 8-25

5 Alarm Control 10-1

6 BCU System Setup 8-37

7 BCU Configuration 8-40

8 BCU Graphs 9-5

9 BCU Alarms 10-4

HVAC CONTROL 12:00 1-Zone Status 6-RTC Setup 2-Zone Setup 7-RTC Bypass 3-Zone Setpts 8-RTC Logs 4-Zone Demand 9-RTC Alarms 5-RTC Status 0-Main Menu

SELECT NUMBER

Item Description Page

1 Zone Status 8-4

2 Zone Setup 8-5

3 Zone Set Points 8-7

4 Zone Demand Control 8-10

5 ARTC Status 8-10

6 ARTC Setup 8-11

7 ARTC Bypass 8-15

8 ARTC Logs 9-1

9 ARTC Alarms 10-2

-

Page 67: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-5

8.4.2. RTC Board Assignments

The Zone Setup screen is composed of two screens where ARTC Boards are assigned to specified zones. A typical BCU network zone configuration is shown in Fig-

ure 6-1. For more information regarding zone manage-ment, see Section 6.1., Zone Management.

To assign an ARTC to a specific zone, enter the zone number in the Zone field adjacent to the desired ARTC board number [1 – 32]. The board number for each ARTC is determined by the network rotary switch settings defined during installation (see Section 4.11., Network Dip Switches and Rotary Dials (COM A and D only)).

There may be more than one ARTC per zone, but no more than 32. However, an ARTC may not belong to more than one zone. ARTC Boards may be arbitrarily assigned and reassigned to zones. To access boards 17-32, press the down arrow once.

8.4.3. Control Methods

The Zone Setup screen is used to define control param-eters that are used to interpret zone set points. Temperature sensors use the setpoints to control HVAC functions within each zone.

RTC Control Method [options] [Normal]

The RTC control method is the method the BCU uses to analyze set points and control HVAC functions. Future versions of the BCU will have alternative control methods; however, current versions only contain the normal method.

Controlled by [options] [RTC Space Temp]

The Controlled by field is used to determine the temper-ature sensor or sensors to be used by the ARTC to control the temperature in the zone. While the Controlled by field is highlighted, the dash key can be used to scroll through available options. The following options are available:

1. RTC Space Temp: The RTC Space Temp method uses the measured Space Tempera-ture to control the zone. A space temperature sensor input is connected to each ARTC. This temperature sensor measures the space tem-perature within the zone.

2. RTC Return Temp: The RTC Return Temp method uses the measured Return Tempera-ture to control the zone. A return air temper-ature sensor input is connected to each ARTC. This temperature sensor measures the return air temperature within the zone.

The following three selections assume that either one or both of the auxiliary inputs on an ARTC board have been defined as SpaceTemp2. Therefore, more than one temper-ature sensor measures the space temperature within the zone. ARTC inputs are defined in the RTC I/O Setup screen (see Section 8.4.12.).

1. Avg RTC Temps: The Avg RTC Temps meth-od calculates the average space temperature from all space temperature sensors connected to the specified ARTC. This average value controls the zone.

2. Max RTC Temps: The Max RTC Temps method determines the highest measurement from the space temperature sensors connect-ed to the specified ARTC. This space temper-ature is used to control the zone.

3. Min RTC Temps: The Min RTC Temps meth-od determines the lowest measurement from the space temperature sensors connected to the specified ARTC. This space temperature is used to control the zone.

The following three selections assume that there is more than one ARTC defined within the specified zone. ARTC boards are assigned to zones at the RTC Board As-signments screen (see Section 8.4.2.).

-

- - 2

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

ZONE SETUP (ZONE01 HVACZONE ) 12:00 RTC Control Method: Normal Controlled by : RTC SPACE TEMP Logging Interval : 015 Minutes Fan1 Occupied Mode: AUTO Fan1 Unoccupd Mode: AUTO

Page 68: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-6 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

1. Avg Zone Temps: The Avg Zone Temps method calculates the average space temper-ature from all ARTC space temperature sen-sors found in the specified zone. This average value controls the zone.

2. Max Zone Temps: The Max Zone Temps method determines the highest measurement from the ARTC space temperature sensors found in the specified zone. This space tem-perature is used to control the zone.

3. Min Zone Temps: The Min Zone Temps method determines the lowest measurement from the ARTC space temperature sensors found in the specified zone. This space tem-perature is used to control the zone.

The following three choices search for all ARTC boards in every zone connected to BCU and determines their associated space temperature values.

1. Avg BCU Temps: The Avg BCU Temps method calculates the average of all space temperature values found. This average value controls the zone.

2. Max BCU Temps: The Max BCU Temps method determines the highest measurement from the space temperature sensors found. This space temperature is used to control the zone.

3. Min BCU Temps: The Min BCU Temps method determines the lowest measurement from the space temperature sensors found. This space temperature is used to control the zone.

Logging Interval [0 – 240 min.] [15 min.]

The ARTC periodically records data and stores the in-formation in the ARTC log (see Section 9.1., RTC Logs). The Logging Interval defines how often the data within each zone are recorded. There is a limited amount of mem-ory for logging; therefore, the smaller the logging interval, the faster the logs will be overwritten.

Fan Occupied Mode/Fan Unoccupied Mode [op-tions] [Auto]

Methods for determining when ARTC fans within a zone should run are entered in the Fan Occupied Mode and the Fan Unoccupied Mode fields. Methods should be cho-sen based on the desired operation of the fan when the building is occupied or unoccupied. Users may choose from the following methods:

1. AUTO: run fans when there is a stage of cool or a stage of heat running.

2. ON: run the fans at all times

3. SUMM-ON/WINT-AUTO: run the fans at all times in the summer mode and run the fans when there is a stage of cool or a stage of heat in the winter mode.

8.4.4. Zone Schedule Setup

The Zone Schedule screen is used to determine when a zone is occupied and unoccupied. For more information about Zone Management, see Section 6.1..

Schedule [00 – 52] [00]

Each schedule is assigned a schedule number when de-fined at the Schedule Setup screen. To assign a schedule to a specific zone, enter the appropriate schedule number in the Schedule field. The ON and OFF operation times de-fined for the schedule will be used to control HVAC func-tions. During ON operation times, the ARTCs will control the zone using occupied mode set points. During OFF op-

eration times, the ARTCs will control the zone using unoc-cupied mode set points.

Override [options] [ICMD, ALRM, OCMD, PROF, SCHD]

When activated, zone overrides will bypass the normal system schedule and the zone will operate in an occupied mode. To override the normal system schedule, the zone must receive a signal from an override source. The override source is either an input sensor or digital output module de-fined under I/O Control (see Section 8.8.2.) or it may be a schedule. If the source signals ON, the ARTC will control the zone according to the occupied mode set points. If the source signals OFF, the ARTC will continue to control the zone using normal system settings. The following override source types determine if an override should be activated:

1. Sensor Input Command (ICMD) - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm (ALRM) - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final

- - 3

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

SCHED SETUP (ZONE01 HVACZONE ) 12:00 Schedule: 00 Override: ICMD 00 OFF

OSS Selections: Occp UnOc Occp UnOc NONE NONE NONE NONE

Page 69: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-7

result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is generated based on a digital or analog signal generated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command (OCMD) - A digi-tal value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Tim-er, Combiner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command (PROF) - A digital val-ue issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule (SCHED) - An application inde-pendent of the Sensor Input and Digital Out-put Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Sched-ule Control in the BCU.

To define a zone schedule override, enter the override source type and source number in the Override field. Source numbers are assigned when input and output mod-ules are defined using I/O Control.

There are two ways to override the specified schedule within a zone, using schedule overrides and using zone schedule overrides. When activated, schedule overrides by-pass the normal system schedule within all zones con-trolled by the schedule. Schedule overrides are defined at the Schedule Setup screen (see Section 8.6.1.). However, a

zone schedule override will bypass the normal system schedule only within the specified zone.

OSS Selections [None/OSS] [None]

To activate the Optimum Start/Stop (OSS) function, se-lect OSS under the appropriate occupied and unoccupied fields.

The Optimum Start/Stop (OSS) feature is designed to activate and deactivate HVAC functions to ensure that zone temperature set points have been reached at the start of the zone occupied or unoccupied mode.

If OSS is selected for occupied mode, thirty minutes prior to the scheduled occupied time the ARTC will begin controlling HVAC functions based on current zone set points. If the zone set point is reached within thirty min-utes, then the next day it will make the switch at twenty-eight minutes. The ARTC will continue to reduce this “Op-timum Start” duration until it finds the Optimum Start time. If the ARTC cannot achieve occupied mode set points within thirty minutes, it adds two minutes to the optimum start time each day.

If OSS is selected for unoccupied mode, fifteen minutes prior to the scheduled unoccupied time, the ARTC will be-gin controlling HVAC functions based on current zone set points. Optimum Stop is default 15 minutes and cannot be modified.

8.4.5. Temp CTL A

Zone set points are sent to the ARTC by the BCU and the ARTC compares these zone set points to sensor read-ings to determine if the current HVAC function within the zone should be activated or deactivated. Sensors are de-fined at the RTC I/O Setup screen (see Section 8.4.12.).

Zone set points are defined beginning with the Temp CTL A screen. Temp CTL A is the first of five screens in which zone set points are defined. Heat and cool set points for summer and winter, dead band values, delay values, and lockout values are defined at this screen.

Summer/Winter [0° – 99° F] [see default screen]

The heat and cool occupied and unoccupied set points for summer and winter are used to define the temperature maintained within the zone.

To define the heat and cool set points for summer and winter, enter the occupied and unoccupied zone tempera-tures in the appropriate fields.

Dead Band [1° – 10° F] [2° F]

The Dead Band is a value equally above and below the temperature set point within which the temperature level is considered to be acceptable. The ARTC will not call for a stage of heat or cool until the dead band is exceeded (see Section 6.3., Heating - Section 6.4., Cooling). Dead bands may be set up to 10° F for heat and for cool.

To define a dead band around the summer and winter set points, enter the desired zone for heat and for cool in the Dead Band field.

Delays [0 – 99 min.] [see default screen]

Time delays are specified measurements of time the ARTC must wait before activating or deactivating a stage of heat or cool. After the ARTC calls for a stage of heat or

-TEMP CTL A (ZONE01 HVACZONE ) 12:00

(UW) SUMTemperatures in Fahernheit

ER WINTER DEAD DELAYS OC UN OC UN BAND ON OFF LOCKOUTHEAT: 70 64 72 66 02 03 00M NONE COOL: 74 78 76 80 02 03 01M NONE =PREV =NEXT ->=SET -=+ZONE (RE) 0=HVAC

M

Page 70: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-8 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

cool, the ARTC will wait the specified ON delay before ini-tiating the first load. After the ARTC calls for a stage of heat or cool to be deactivated, the ARTC will wait the spec-ified OFF delay before deactivating the appropriate load.

To define an ON or OFF delay, enter the desired time (up to 99) minutes in the ON and OFF delay fields.

Lockout [Cool in Winter/None] [None]

Lockout values specify the system to keep cools off in the winter mode, and heats off in the summer mode regard-less of the sensor temperature reading. Lockout values pro-hibit the system from calling for a stage of cool during dehumidification (see Section 6.5., Dehumidification).

To define lockouts for heat and for cool, enter a "1" in the corresponding Lockout fields.

8.4.6. RH% Inside

Each ARTC is capable of monitoring humidity with up to two, user-defined input sensors. These zone sensors are set up to monitor relative humidity percentages or inside dew points. The method of monitoring humidity within a zone is dictated by the type of sensor connected to an ARTC auxiliary input within a zone (see Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup).

After the ARTC finds a valid relative humidity or dew point sensor, the sensor reading is compared to the zone de-humidification set point defined at the RH% Inside screen.

DeHum By [RH%/Dewpt/Disable] [RH%]

Zone sensors measure either the relative humidity or the dew point. Zone humidity levels may be measured us-ing a humidity sensor or a humidistat. The zone dew point may be measured using a dew point probe or a dew point control switch. Enter the appropriate method in the DeHum By field.

DeHum DPT [0° – 99° F] [Occupied=65° F, Un-occ=75° F]

Enter an occupied or unoccupied dew point value if de-humidification is being controlled using a dew point read-ing.

DeHum RH% [0 – 100%] [Occupied=55%, Unoccu-pied=65%]

Enter an occupied and unoccupied humidity value if de-humidification is being controlled using a humidity read-ing.

Dead Band [1° – 10° F] [4° F]

The Dead Band is a value equally above and below the dehumidification set point within which the humidity level is considered to be acceptable. The ARTC will not activate a stage of dehumidification until the dead band is exceeded (see Section 6.5., Dehumidification).

To define a dead band around the dehumidification set points, enter the desired zone in the Dead Band field.

Humidify [0 – 100%] [Occupied=30%, Unocc=0%]

Enter an occupied and unoccupied humidity value if de-humidification is being controlled using a humidifier.

Minimum Temperature [0° – 99° F] [70° F]

To prevent the space temperature within a zone from becoming too cold, the minimum temperature for using cooling stages during dehumidification may be defined in the Min Temp field. If the zone space temperature reading drops below this set point, dehumidification is disabled.

- -

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET -=+ZONE (RE) 0=HVAC

RH% INSIDE (ZONE01 HVACZONE ) 12:00

OCC UNO DeHum DPt: 065F 075F Dehum By: RH%DeHum RH%: 055% 065% DeadBand: 04Humidify : 030% 000% Min Temp: 70

Page 71: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-9

8.4.7. Miscellaneous Set Points

The BCU incorporates several energy-saving capabili-ties including a process called economization. Economiza-tion is the process of allowing outside air into the Rooftop Unit as a stage of cool to conserve energy (see Section 6.8., Economization).

When controlling economization using a dew point sensor, define the dew point set point at the Miscellaneous Set Points screen. This value should be the maximum out-side dew point at which economization is permitted. Econ-omization is disabled when the control value exceeds the dew point set point by 2° F.

Digital Economization is activated at the RTC I/O Set-up screen (see Section 8.4.12.). Analog Economization is activated at the RTC I/O Setup screen and its operating pa-rameters are defined at the Analog Output screen (see Sec-tion 8.4.16.) and RTC Setup screen (see Section 8.4.16.). If a value is entered in the DewPt Stpt field, and a dew point sensor has not been defined under I/O Control, economiza-tion will not take place.Summer Econ and Winter Econ method describes the type of sensors or calculations used to determine if economization is advantageous.

Economization can be controlled by several different devices. The three letter code that proceeds the economiza-tion type description matches the code that is displayed on the main status screen of the BCU. These devices are:

EC1 Sensor Availability-Sensor calculation that comes from sensors that are already

available in the system.

EC2 Local Enthalpy SW-An input defined as an enthalpy switch will determine whether to economize or not.

EC3 Dew Point Setpt-The dewpoint is calcu-lated from temperature and humidity read-ings and is compared to a dewpoint setpoint to determine whether to economize or not.

EC4 Enthalpy Calc-An enthalpy calculation based upon humidity and temperature. This calculation is then compared between the outside enthalpy and the inside enthalpy. If the outside enthalpy is less than the inside en-thalpy, economization is possible.

EC5 Global Enthalpy SW-A global enthalpy switch input is used to determine whether to economize or not.

EC6 Other Zone Enth-SW-An enthalpy switch in another zone is used to determine whether to economize

EC7 Dew Point FailSafe-If the outside air temperature is less than the dewpoint set-point, economization is possible.

EC8 Compare Temp/Temp-If the outside air temperature is less than the inside air temper-ature, economization is possible.

The Econ Lockout Temp is a setting that doesn’t allow economization if the outside temperature is higher than the cool lockout setpoint (when the cool lockout setpoint is val-id). The Econ Lockout Temp prevents the controller from initiating an economization when conditions are not favor-able. If an error occurs in the relative humidity sensor read-ing and a low reading is received in the controller even though the temperature might be very warm (90° F), the hot air will not be economized if the Econ Lockout Temp set-point is anywhere below 90° F.

8.4.8. Alarm Set Points

Alarm set points may be set for the occupied and unoc-cupied space temperature, and for the supply temperature. When the measured reading from the corresponding tem-perature sensor drops below or exceeds the alarm set point, an alarm is sent to the Alarm Log and, if installed, the 485 Alarm Panel.

To activate the alarm capability within each zone, enter the LO and HI alarm set points for the occupied space, un-occupied space, and supply temperatures at the Alarm Set

- - 2

=PREV =NEXT =SET -=+ZONE (RE) 0=MENU

MISC SETPTS (ZONE01 HVACZONE ) 12:00

Outside DewPoint: NONE

Winter Econ method: Sensor Availability

con If Outside Dewpt is Less Than 00FE

Econ Lockout Temp.: NONE

Summer Econ method: Sensor Availability

- - 3

Page 72: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-10 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Points screen. Alarms may be viewed, archived, and/or ac-knowledged at the RTC Alarms screen (see Section 10.2.).

8.4.9. Copy to Zones

The Copy to Zones function may be used to transfer temperature and humidity set points between zones having identical requirements.

To copy a zone’s setpoint, enter the zone to be copied in the From Zone field. Enter the zone to be copied to in the To Zone field. Enter a zero in the To Zone field to copy data to all defined zones.

8.4.10. Shed Set Points for HVAC

Demand Control is the cycle of reading current de-mand, predicting energy consumption within a calculated demand window, and shedding loads if the demand limit is likely to be exceeded. Although reading current demand and predicting current energy consumption is continuous, load shedding may be specified to occur only within a lim-ited temperature range and fixed duration.

Load Shed Priority [0 – 16] [00 (Disabled)]

Load shed priority numbers determine which devices are shed first during demand control. There are 16 priority levels to choose from, 16 being the highest, one being the lowest. When the demand control algorithm sheds loads, it begins by shedding loads with high priority numbers. As

the need for load shedding increases, loads with lower pri-ority levels are shed.

Min Temperature/Max Temperature [0° – 99° F] [0° F]

To prevent the space temperature in the zone from be-coming too high or too low, maximum and minimum tem-perature levels are defined in the Min and Max Temperature fields. When the space temperature falls be-low or exceeds these set points, the call for load shed is dis-abled.

Maximum Shed Time [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

Maximum shed time set points are defined in the Max Shed Time field to limit the duration of load shed within a specified zone. When activated, the call for load shed is disabled after load shedding has been active for the speci-fied time.

Minimum NON-Shed Time [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

To prevent repetitive load shed activation, load shed time delays are set in the Min NON-Shed Time field. When the BCU calls for a load to be shed in a zone, the ARTC cannot shed that load until the minimum NON-shed time value is exceeded.

8.4.11. RTC Status

See Section 8.1., Default Status Screens

- - 4

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

COPY ZONE TEMP AND RH% SETPTS 12:00

Copy Setpts from ZONE01 To ZONE01.

-

-ZONE01 STAT (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00

FAN HT1 HT2 CL1 CL2 SEN AX2 EC0 DEH OCC .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. .. << OFFLINE >>SPC(00-00) SUPLY RETRN CCA AUX-01 AUX-02 .... .... .... ... ...... ......

=PREV ->=+RTC 0=MENU

Page 73: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-11

8.4.12. RTC I/O Setup

The RTC I/O Setup screen is the first of four screens used to setup all inputs and outputs connected to an ARTC board. There are eight available input connections and eight available output connections. Inputs and outputs should be defined according to the physical input or output connected to the ARTC.

Enter the number of the ARTC board to be defined in the RTC field. If a name has been defined for the specified ARTC board, it will be displayed in the following field. If the RTC board has not been named, the BCU will display the rooftop number that corresponds to the RTC number in the RoofTop field. Edit or add the name if the defined ARTC board has not been appropriately named.

The six pre-defined inputs are:

1 SPC (space temp)

2 SUP (supply temp)

3 RTN (return temp)

4 PF1 (cool 1 proof)

5 PF2 (cool 2 proof)

6 AIR (air flow switch)

The six pre-defined outputs include:

1 FAN (fan output)

2 HT1 (heat 1 output)

3 HT2 (heat 2 output)

4 CL1 (cool 1 output)

5 CL2 (cool 2 output)

6 ECO (digital economizer)

Only these inputs or outputs can be connected to the predefined points on the ARTC. The corresponding input or output may be activated in the RTC I/O Setup screen. The ARTC is capable of operating a rooftop unit as soon as a single space temperature probe has been defined as an ARTC input connection and power has been supplied to the board.

There are also two auxiliary inputs (AX1 and AX2), two auxiliary outputs (AUX1 and AUX2), and two analog outputs (AO1 and AO2) connections on an ARTC. The ARTC can control a variable speed fan using one of the available analog outputs. The number of heat or cool stages that are currently active will determine the fan’s speed.

To activate any of the pre-defined inputs or outputs, en-ter "1" for DEFINED under the corresponding inputs or outputs that are connected to the ARTC. To deactivate these inputs and outputs, enter "0" for NONE under the cor-responding input or output field.

If a digital economizer output is not defined (ECO), digital economization within the area controlled by the specified ARTC is disabled. Economization is performed with a digital or analog economizer depending on the type of economizer installed at the rooftop unit. Analog econo-mizers are defined at either the AO1 or AO2 analog outputs on the ARTC. For more information about Economization, see Section 6.8.

Auxiliary Inputs

There are 18 auxiliary input types available and are de-fined according to the following table. These input types may be viewed by pressing the red key followed by "*".

-

=PREV =NEXT -=+RTC ->=SET 0=HVAC MENU

RTC IO SETUP (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00

SPS SUP RTN PF1 PF2 AIR AX1 AX2 1 0 0 0 0 0 00 00

FAN HT1 HT2 CL1 CL2 AX1 AX2 ECO AO1 AO2 1 1 1 1 1 00 00 0 0 0

Type Description

0 NONE

1 Mixed Air: temperature sensor that measures the combined outside and return air temperature.

2 Outside Temperature: outside air temperature sen-sor.

3 Space Temp 2: secondary space temperature sensor.

4 Cool 3 Proof (digital): proof input for the defined Cool 3 Output.

5 Cool 4 Proof (digital): proof input for the defined Cool 4 Output.

6 Outside Humidity 4-20 ma (analog): 4-20 ma out-side humidity sensor.

7 Inside Humidity 4-20 ma (analog): 4-20 ma inside humidity sensor.

8 Outside Humidity 5 volt (analog): 5 volt outside hu-midity sensor.

9 Inside Humidity 5 volt (analog): 5 volt inside hu-midity sensor.

10 Humidistat (digital): measures the humidity and compares it to the set point defined within the sen-sor. There is a contact closure when the humidity level falls below the set point.

Table 8-2 - Auxiliary Input Types (Sheet 1 of 2)

Page 74: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-12 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

To activate an auxiliary input on an ARTC board, enter the corresponding input type into the columns labeled AX1 and AX2 in the first row at the RTC I/O Setup screen.

Auxiliary Outputs

There are 13 auxiliary output types available and should be defined according to the following table. These

output types may be viewed by pressing the red key fol-lowed by "*".

To activate an auxiliary output on an ARTC board, en-ter the corresponding output type into the columns labeled AUX1 and AUX2 in the second row at the RTC I/O Setup screen.

Analog Outputs

When performing economization with an analog econ-omizer, define the analog output as an economizer. Two analog output connections are available within an ARTC. To setup an analog economizer, enter "1" for ECO at AO1 or AO2. Analog economizer control parameters are defined at the Analog Outputs screen (see Section 8.4.14.) and at the RTC Setup screen (see Section 8.4.16.).

8.4.13. Analog Output Setup

When economization is activated in a zone using an an-alog economizer, the economizer will modulate based on analog output set points. For more information about Econ-omization, see Section 6.8.

MIN(V) and MAX(V) [0 – 10 V] [Min=0 V, Max=10 V]

The ARTC modulates the damper by sending the ap-propriate voltage to the analog economizer. By default, the output will modulate at 0-10 V DC. Voltages should be de-fined based on the controlling motor of the economizer

11 Enthalpy Switch (digital): measures the enthalpy and compares it to the set point defined within the sensor. There is a contact closure when the enthalpy level falls below the set point.

12 Light Sensor (analog): measures light in foot-can-dles.

13 Light Sensor (digital): measures light and generates contact closure when the light level reaches a de-fined level.

14 Freez-Stat (digital): measures the temperature of the evaporator coil and gives a dry contact closure when the temperature is at or below freezing.

15 Smoke Detector (digital): gives a dry contact closure when smoke is detected.

16 Filter Alarm (digital): gives a dry contact closure when a dirty/clogged filter is detected.

17 Temperature: general temperature sensor input for monitoring only.

18 Override SW (digital): toggle switch used to signal an override.

Type Description

Table 8-2 - Auxiliary Input Types (Sheet 2 of 2)

Type Description

0 NONE

1 Cool 3: Third stage of cool

2 Cool 4: Fourth stage of cool

3 Heat 3: Third stage of heat

4 Heat 4: Fourth stage of heat

5 Fan 2: Additional fan

6 Heat pump reversing valve - closed (cool): If a heat pump is used, the reversing valve will close for a cooling stage and open for a heating stage.

7 Alarm: An output relay will be activated when any RTC Alarm is generated. This relay will return to the normal position when the alarm condition is deacti-vated.

8 Humidity: An output for a humidifier.

9 Heat pump reversing valve - closed (heat): If a heat pump is used, the reversing valve will close for a heating stage and open for a cooling stage.

10 Fail-safe: An output relay ON will be activated when the ARTC board is on-line.

11 Econ Shadow: Operated the same as an ECO output.

12 Dehum: An output for a dehumidifier.

Table 8-3 - Auxiliary Output Types

- -

=PREV =NEXT -=+RTC ->=SET 0=HVAC MENU

ANALOG OUT (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00

MIN(V) MAX(V) MIN% MODEAnalog Output1: 00.0 10.0 000% 0Analog Output2: 00.0 10.0 000% 0 Status of Analog Outputs: 000% 000%

Page 75: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-13

damper. The ARTC will automatically send the appropriate voltage to the economizer according to the desired position of the damper.

To define the modulation voltage, enter the minimum voltage to be sent to the economizer when the output is OFF in the MIN(V) field. Enter the maximum voltage to be sent to the economizer when the output is at 100% in the MAX(V) field. These values will be between 0 V DC and 10 V DC depending on the controlling motor.

MIN% [0% – 100%]

The economizer damper will proportionally modulate based on the throttling range, which is fixed at 10° F around the analog economization temperature set point. When the

mixed air or supply air temperature falls to the bottom of the throttling range, the economizer damper will modulate closed or the damper will modulate to its minimum posi-tion.

To define this minimum position, enter the percentage the economizer should stay open on a call to close in the MIN% field.

MODE [0 – 1] [0]

To modulate the economizer damper to the minimum percentage only when in an occupied mode, enter "1" in the MODE field. By default, the economizer will modulate based on the minimum percentage at all times.

8.4.14. RTC Setup

Fan1 Delay for Heat (ON) (OFF) [0 – 240 sec.] [60 sec.]

On a call for heat, the ARTC will activate the fan after the duration specified in the Fan1 Delay Heat ON field. This is in addition to any delay built into the Rooftop Unit. When a heat stage is deactivated, the ARTC leaves the fan ON for the duration specified.

Fan2 Operation mode [1 – 3] [1]

If Fan2 is defined as an auxiliary output on the ARTC, the fan is activated during the second stage of heat and dur-ing the second stage of cool. When activated, Fan1 is deac-tivated and Fan2 turns on. Currently, this operational mode is the only active mode for Fan2 operation. The other op-tions available on the RTC Setup screen will become active in future versions of the BCU.

When a second stage of heat or cool is deactivated, Fan2 is deactivated, and Fan1 is reactivated. However, there is a ten second delay for Fan2 to spin down before Fan1 starts. This delay is hard-coded in the BCU and can-not be modified.

Maximum Cools for Dehum [0 – 4] [1]

A maximum number of cooling stages used during de-humidification may be defined to prevent the space temper-ature level from dropping too low. If this set point is set to

the default of one, compressors two, three, and four will not be used during dehumidification. To specify the maximum number of cooling stages used during dehumidification, enter the desired value in the Max Cools for Dehum field.

Makeup Air [Yes/No] [No]

To activate the makeup air application within an ARTC, enter YES in the Makeup Air field. Makeup over-ride times and minimum running ARTC fans may be de-fined at the Makeup air screen (see Section 8.4.16.). For more information about the Makeup Air strategy, see Sec-tion 6.9.

Return Temp Control [Yes/No]

By default, most HVAC applications use the current space temperature as the controlling value. Temperature readings are compared to the defined set points to deter-mine if an HVAC application should be activated. HVAC applications may also be controlled using the current return air temperature.

To change the controlling value for HVAC applications from the space temperature value to the return air tempera-ture value, enter YES in the Return Temp Control field.

Analog Economization Temp [00° – 99° F] [00° F]

When economization is activated in a zone using an an-alog economizer, the economizer will modulate based on the mixed air temperature. If a mixed air temperature sen-sor is not found, the economizer will modulate based on the supply air temperature. These control temperatures are compared to the analog economization temperature set point to determine the position of the economizer damper. The economizer damper will proportionally modulate based on the throttling range that is fixed at 10° F around the analog economization temperature set point.

To define the economization temperature set point, en-ter the desired temperature in the Analog Econ Temp field.

- - 2

=PREV ->= -= +NEXT SET 0=HVAC MENU

RTC SETUP (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00

Fan1 Delay for Heat: 060(ON) 060(OFF)

Fan2 Operation mode: 1

Return Temp Control: NO Copy Setup From RTC01 to RTC01

Max Cools for Dehum: 1 Makeup Air:NO

= RTC

Page 76: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-14 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Copy Setup

The Copy function may be used to transfer the defined parameters defined at this screen between ARTCs having identical requirements.

1. Enter the ARTC to be copied in the from

field.

2. Enter the zone to be copied to in the to field.

3. Enter zero in the To RTC field to copy data to all ARTCs.

8.4.15. Supply Temp Cool Lockout

The Supply Temp Cool Lockout screen can be used to keep mechanical cool stages from coming on when the sup-ply air temperature is at or below the user-defined setpoint. Cool Lockout allows an economizer to condition an area without a compressor stage turning on when the space tem-perature hasn’t been met within the cool on-delay period.

Lockout Enable [YES/NO][NO]

To activate Temp Cool Lockout, the default setting must be changed to Yes within the controller. Once Lock-

out Enable is set to Yes, mechanical cooling stages may be prevented from engaging.

Lockout Setpt [0°– 99° F][0° F]

The Lockout set point can be set anywhere from 0° to 99° F. The default set point is 0° F.

Lockout Throttling Range [4° – 30° F][10° F]

When the throttling range is set, the BCU will look at the supply air temperature to see if the supply air tempera-ture is below the supply air setpoint. If the supply air tem-perature is below the supply air set point plus half of the throttling range, no additional compressors will be allowed to stage on because the supply temperature is within the modulating range of the economizer. During this lockout, no compressors that were previously running will be shut off.

After the supply temperature rises above the lockout setpoint plus half of the throttling range, the additional compressors may be allowed to come on if the BCU calls for them.

8.4.16. RTC Setup (Makeup Air)

RTU economizers and fans have a wide degree of vari-ability. RTU economizers and fans can be used to provide outside air to maintain positive pressure within a building or to overcome the negative pressure affects of building ex-haust fans. For this reason, the BCU makeup air strategy is configured completely with user-defined set points, and makes no predictions or assumptions about when or how makeup air should be enabled. For more information about the makeup air strategy, see Section 6.9.

To setup a makeup air strategy, the user must provide the following information:

Damper Offset [0 – 100%]

To provide the required amount of makeup air, ARTCs are commanded to increase the position of their outside air dampers by an additional calculated amount. This calcula-tion is based on the offset percentage and the number of in-active RTUs within the zone. RTU air dampers will modulate the number of inactive ARTCs times the defined offset percentage. For example, if the damper offset is 1% and five ARTC fans are not running, the remaining ARTCs will increase their damper position by 5% (five units X 1%).

The Damper Offset Percentage is defined in the Damp-er Offset field.

MUA-Timer [5 – 60 min.] [10 min.]

An ARTC will be placed in makeup mode when all fans participating in a stage of heat or cool are running and the required amount of makeup air has not been achieved or the minimum number of fans are not running. These ARTCs will remain in makeup mode until there is positive pressure in the controlled space and the minimum requirement of

- - 3

=PREV 0= MENU

SUPPLY TEMP COOL LOCKOUT 12:00

(RTC01 RoofTop01 )

Supply Temp Cool Lockout TR : 10

Supply Temp Cool Lockout Enable:NOSupply Temp Cool Lockout Setpt : 00

=NEXT -=+RTC ->=SET

- - 4

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

MAKEUP AIR DISABLED 12:00 Damper Offset:000% MUA-Timer: 10 min Enable:ALWAYS Schd:01 Min-Fans:01 When OAT Disabled: DISABLEAT Enable: 55(Min) 75(Max)

00 of 00 MUA Fans On Calcd Damper:000%MUA: 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000

O

Page 77: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-15

fans is met. However, the duration an ARTC may be placed in makeup mode is limited by the MUA-Timer.

When there is a call for an ARTC to run in makeup mode, the ARTC will run only for the amount of time de-fined in the MUA-Timer field. The BCU will then sequen-tially rotate to the next available controller. This rotation distributes the fan times fairly among the participating con-trollers.

Enable [options] [Digital]

The makeup air application may be enabled by a sched-ule, by a digital input, or it may be active at all times. If controlling using a schedule, the BCU will only allow makeup air based on the ON and OFF times defined by the schedule designated at the SCHED field. If controlling by a digital input, the BCU will only allow makeup air when the BCU receives a contact closure from a digital input de-fined as a makeup air input in I/O Control (see Section 8.8.2.).

The method by which the makeup air application may be enabled is defined in the Enable field.

Schedule [01 – 56]

If the makeup air application is defined to be enabled by a schedule, this schedule is defined in the Schd field. Users may choose from all 56 available schedules defined at the Schedule Setup screen (see Section 8.6.1.).

Minimum-Fans [1 – 32]

During occupancy, a defined minimum number of fans will run at all times to provide the appropriate makeup air.

This minimum set point is defined in the Min-Fans field. Up to 32 fans may run at one time according to how many ARTCs are attached to the BCU. Selecting "0" dis-ables the application.

OAT Enable [0° – 99° F] [Min=55° F, Max=75° F]

Regardless of the option selected in the Enable field, makeup air will not begin unless the outside air temperature falls within the range specified using the OAT Enable fields.

To define the range within which the makeup air appli-cation may be activated, enter the minimum and maximum outside air temperature in the OAT Enable field.

OAT Disabled

OAT can be set to Disabled. When set to Disabled, the following three options are available:

1. Disable Makeup Air-Makeup air is disabled

2. MUA Fans On-Fans will come on for make-up air but the damper offset is set to zero

3. MUA Fans On When Occupied-Strategy 2 is active only when the building is occu-pied.When unoccupied, disable makeup air.

8.4.17. RTC Bypass

Any output defined at the RTC I/O Setup screen may be bypassed for either a specific duration or until the output is returned to normal operation. A timed bypass overrides the

settings for the specified period of time. A fixed bypass overrides the settings after the initiation of the bypass until the bypass command is returned to normal at the RTC By-pass screen.

To activate an ARTC bypass, specify the bypass com-mand for each defined ARTC output at the RTC Bypass screen. Bypass commands may be defined as an ON com-mand, OFF command, or normal system settings com-mand. If an ON or OFF command is selected, specify the type of bypass desired for each defined ARTC output. By-passes may be fixed or timed. If a timed bypass is selected, specify the period of time the bypass should override sys-tem settings for each defined ARTC output.

-

=PREV -=+RTC ->=SET (RE) 0=HVAC MENU

RTC BYPASS (RTC01 RoofTop ) 12:00

FAN HT1 HT2 CL1 CL2 AX1 AX2 EC0 AO1 AO2 TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM TIM 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000 000

Page 78: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-16 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.5. Demand Control

8.5.1. Power Circuit(s) Setup

The BCU is capable of monitoring up to 4 electric meters or 4 pulse type watt-hour transducers with different kWh/pulse multipliers. Each circuit needs to be set up so that it has its own log. The log can be either an hourly, dai-ly, or monthly record. Only circuit 1 can be set to perform load shedding. Circuits 2,3, and 4 are only capable of pow-er monitoring.

8.5.2. Demand Set Points

The BCU requires demand settings to initiate and per-form demand control. These settings are defined in the De-mand Set Points screen.

Demand Set Point Summer/Winter [0 – 9999 kW] [1000 kW]

The Demand Limit set point is a pre-defined level of energy consumption at which a power company greatly in-creases its rates. Separate set points for summer and for winter may be defined.

Enter the appropriate demand limit set points for sum-mer and winter in kilowatts in the Demand Set Point Sum-mer and Winter fields.

Window Time Period [3 – 60 min.] [15 min.]

To determine if the demand limit set point is being ex-ceeded, power companies monitor energy consumption for a fixed period of time. This duration is called the Demand Window. Enter the demand window used by the power company in the Window Time Period field.

Logging Interval [0 – 60 min.] [15 min.]

Enter the logging interval that the BCU will use to send kW readings to the Demand Status log.

Load Shed Activation [options] [SCHD 00]

When defined, demand control takes place constantly within the BCU. However, whether load shedding actually takes place as a result of demand monitoring is determined by a load shed activation command. The BCU may be in-structed to perform load shedding using any of the follow-ing five command types:

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value is-

DEMAND CONTROL 12:00 1-Circuit(s) Setup

4-Load

Shed

Setup

2-Demand Setpts

7-Load Shed Status

3-Demand Alarm 8-Logs

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

5-Power Status6-Demand Statuso

Item Description Page

1 Circuit(s) Setup 8-16

2 Demand Set Points 8-16

3 Demand Alarm Set Points 8-17

4 Load Shed Status 8-18

5 Load Shed Setup 8-18

6 Power Status 8-19

7 Demand Status 8-19

8 Logs 9-2

-

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

POWER CIRCUITS SETUP 12:00

Circuit 1 Sensor:

Circuit 3 Sensor: Circuit 4 Sensor:

Circuit 2 Sensor: 000000

00

-DEMAND SETPOINTS 12:00 Demand Setpoint Summer : 1000 KW Winter : 1000 KW Window Time Period : 15 min Logging Interval : 15 min Load Shed Activation : SCHD 00 NONE =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 79: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-17

sued by the Sensor Input Module as a final re-sult of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is gen-erated based on a digital or analog signal gen-erated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value is-sued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Com-biner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sensor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Con-trol in the BCU.

To instruct the BCU to perform load shedding as a re-sult of demand monitoring, enter the command type and source number in the Load Shed Activation field. The source number is the Input or Output Module number spec-ified in I/O Control (see Section 8.8.2.).

Load Shed Sensor Input [0 – 48] [0]

The Load Shed Sensor Input field is the field to the im-mediate right of the Load Shed Activation field. To per-form demand monitoring and control, the BCU must receive a kW value from either an analog or digital input. The corresponding input’s number needs to be entered in the Load Shed Sensor Input field.

8.5.3. Demand Alarm Set Points

A demand alarm or notice is a warning that signifies an abnormal kW reading within the BCU. When the current kW reading exceeds the user-defined High Demand Alarm set point, an alarm or notice will be generated.

High Demand Alarm [0 – 9999 kW] [1050 kW]

The BCU will send an alarm or notice when the sys-tem’s kW reading exceeds the High Demand Alarm set point.

Enter the High Demand Alarm set point in the High De-mand Alarm field. Alarms may be viewed, archived, and

acknowledged at the BCU Alarms screen (see Section 10.5.).

Delay [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

The Time Delay is the specified duration the BCU must wait before generating an alarm or notice.

Enter the desired delay in the Delay field.

Alarm-Notice [Alarm/Notice/Disabled] [Disabled]

An alarm appears in an alarm log and may be accompa-nied by a contact closure for on-site operation of a bell, light, horn, etc. and may also be accompanied by an alarm dial-out sequence and/or activation of the 485 Alarm An-nunciator Panel. A notice creates an entry in an alarm log and initiates no other signal.

To activate a Demand Alarm when the KW reading ex-ceeds the user-defined High Demand Alarm Set Point, specify Alarm in the Alarm-Notice field. To activate a De-mand Notice when the KW reading exceeds the user-de-fined High Demand Alarm Set Point, specify Notice in the Alarm-Notice field. Select Disabled if no alarms or notices are desired.

-ALARM SETPOINTS 12:00 High Demand Alarm : 0000 KW Delay : 000 min Alarm-Notice : Disabled

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 80: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-18 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.5.4. Load Shed Setup

All 32 ARTCs and 48 Digital Output Modules may be designated for load shed. The Load Shed Setup screen pro-vides options for setting up either HVAC RTCs (ARTCs) or Sensor Outputs (Digital Output Modules).

8.5.5. HVAC RTCs Shed Setup

Any of the 32 ARTCs may be designated for load shed using the HVAC RTCs Shed Setup screen. To incorporate a specific ARTC into the BCU load shed strategy, the shed priority and kW requirements of the ARTC must be de-fined.

Zone/Load Shed Priority [0 – 16] [0 (Disabled]

For each specified ARTC, a load shed priority is de-fined. ARTCs may be defined to load shed priority levels 1-16. Level 1 is the lowest priority and loads within this level will shed last. Level 16 is the highest priority level and loads within this level will shed first. Load shedding may be disabled if a priority level of zero is assigned to an ARTC.

The BCU first examines the sheddable load that is at the lowest priority level (16). If this load is not available for

shedding, the next priority level is searched until a sheddable load is found. The proper combination of sheddable loads is found when the total kW shed lowers the predicted kW below the demand set point.

Power Requirements For Each Stage [0 – 240 kW] [0 kW]

Each load controlled by an ARTC has a specific kW rating. This rating is used by the BCU to determine which loads within the priority level must be shed to reduce ener-gy consumption below the Demand Limit Set Point. Enter the total kW rating of the loads controlled by an ARTC in the field below the appropriate load.

If curtailment is available, it may be assigned to any of the stages within each ARTC at the HVAC RTCs Shed Set-up screen. When a non-voltage contact closure is detected in an input defined as Curtail (see Section 8.8.2., Input Set-up), curtailment is activated and all HVAC loads setup for curtailment will be turned off for 15 minutes regardless of any other control settings. To assign a load within the ARTC to curtailment, enter "1" in the field below the ap-propriate load after the power requirement. For an ideal curtailment, the ARTC needs to recognize that all heat and cool stages are in "curtailment" and proceed to shed the fan. This is accomplished by selecting YES in the Fan Curtails with Load field.

8.5.6. Sensor Outputs

Any of 48 possible Digital Output Modules may be des-ignated for load shed using the Sensor Shed Setup screen. To incorporate a specific Output Module into the BCU load shed strategy, the shed priority and kW capacity of the module must be defined.

Zone/Load Shed Priority [0 – 16] [0 (Disabled)]

Modules may be defined to load shed priority levels 1-16. Level 1 is the lowest priority and loads within this level will shed last. Level 16 is the highest priority level and

-LOAD SHED SETUP 12:00 1-HVAC RTCs 2-Sensor Outputs

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

- -

=PRE =SET 0= MENU

SHED SETUP (RTC 12:00 Fan curtails with load:

Power Requirements For Each Stage (KW) HT1 HT2 CL1 CL2 AX1 AX2

V -=+RTC

000 000000 000 000 000

NO

01 RoofTop01 )

- -SHED SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00

Type: Output Load Shed Priority : 0 KW Capacity of This Output: 000 =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

0

Page 81: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-19

loads within this level will shed first. Load shedding may be disabled if a priority level of zero is assigned to an Mod-ule.

The BCU first examines the sheddable load that is at the lowest priority level 16. If this load is not available for shedding, the next priority level is searched until a sheddable load is found. The proper combination of sheddable loads is found when the total kW shed lowers the predicted kW below the demand set point.

kW Capacity of This Output [0 – 240 kW] [0 kW]

Each load controlled by a Digital Output Module has a specific kW rating. This rating is used by the BCU to deter-mine which loads within a priority level must be shed to re-duce energy consumption below the Demand Limit Set Point. Enter the total kW rating of the loads controlled by a Digital Output Module in the Capacity field.

8.5.7. Power Status (Circuits 1-4)

The Power Status screen displays the status of the pow-er monitoring circuits 1-4. The status screen for each circuit can be viewed by pressing the up or down arrow.

8.5.8. Demand Status

The Demand Status screen displays the current status of demand control within the BCU. Information displayed on this screen includes the ON/OFF status of demand, a sum-mation of the times the BCU has been in demand, the cur-rent demand limit set point, current power usage, peak power usage, power use in the past hour, and power total for the day.

Demand

When the BCU is in demand (loads are being shed to re-duce kW usage), an ON will appear in the Demand field. When the BCU is not in demand, an OFF will appear in the Demand field.

Timer

A timer within the BCU calculates the number of hours and minutes the BCU has been in demand during the last 24-hour time period. The timer resets every night at mid-night and the cumulative demand time is cleared.

Set Point

The demand limit set point determines if the BCU should go into demand. This set point is defined for sum-mer and for winter at the Demand Set Points screen (see Section 8.5.2.). The current demand set point is displayed in the Setpt field.

Current Power Usage

The current kW reading provided by the kW transducer or watt-hour transducer is displayed in the Current Power Usage field.

Peak Power Today

The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by the kW or watt-hour transducer during a specified period of time. The peak power for the day is displayed in the Peak Power Today field along with the time of its occurrence. This measurement may help determine the time of day to minimize active loads to help reduce power consumption.

Energy Used This Hr

The kW measurement for the previous hour is dis-played in the Energy Used This Hr field

Energy Used Today

The total kW usage for the day is displayed in the Ener-gy Used Today field.

-

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

POWER STATUS - CIRCUIT 01 12:00

Current Power Usage :

Energy Used Today : Energy Used This Month :

Energy Used This Hour : 0000 KWH0000 KWH0000 KWH

0000 KW

-DEMAND STATUS 12:00 Demand:OFF Timer: 00:00 Setpt: 0000KW Current Power Usage: 0000KW Peak Power Today : 0KW @ 00:00 Energy Used This Hr: 0000KW Energy Used Today : 00000KW

=PREV 0=MENU

Page 82: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-20 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.5.9. Load Shed Status

The Load Shed Status screen displays the current status of the load shedding process within demand control.

KW Now

The kW now field displays the current kW reading be-ing supplied by the kilowatt or watt-hour transducer.

Avail

The Avail field displays the total number of kilowatts currently available for load shedding.

Predict

The Predict field displays the predicted energy con-sumption based on the predictive calculations performed by the demand control algorithm.

Set Point

The Set Point field displays the current Demand Limit Set Point as defined at the Demand Set Points screen.

Required

The Required field displays the difference between the Predicted field and the Set Point field, and represents the amount that current energy consumption must be reduced by so that the Demand Limit Set Point is not reached.

Requested

The Requested field displays the number of kilowatts that have been shed to ensure that the Demand Limit Set Point is not reached.

RTCs

A single field is provided for all possible ARTCs con-trolled by the BCU (32 max). If an ARTC is currently in load shed, the corresponding RTC status field will display the lowest number stage that has been shed. That is, if cool-ing stages two and three have been shed, then a two will display in the RTC status field.

When a load is designated for load shed, load stages are shed in order of highest to lowest until the demand control requirements have been met.

Sensors

A single field is provided for all possible Digital Output Modules configured within the BCU (48 max). If a Digital Output Module is currently in load shed, the corresponding Sensor status field will display a 1.

8.6. Schedule Control

-

SCHEDULE CONTROL 12:00 1-Schedule SetUp 2-Global Date Ranges

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

Item Description Page

1 Schedule Setup 8-21

2 Global Date Ranges 8-24

Page 83: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-21

8.6.1. Schedule Setup

8.6.2. Override Schedule

Any of the 56 possible schedules may be bypassed us-ing Schedule Overrides. When activated, schedule over-rides bypass the normal system schedule.

ACTIVE/UNUSED [Active]

The active flag must be set from one of the six schedule screens to activate the specified system schedule. When the system schedule is active, all defined schedule overrides

are also active. Schedule overrides will control the system when set points are defined for the desired override from the Schedule Override screens.

ON/OFF [0000 – 2400] [0000 (Not Defined)]

To define a schedule override within the specified sys-tem schedule, enter the schedule number in the Schedule Number field, and enter the times in a 24 hour period the schedule should be active.

Copy to Schedule

To activate the same schedule override within other system schedules, enter the target schedules in the Copy to Schedule field.

Days-Left [0 – 99 Days] [0 Days]

The number of days the schedule is to be active is en-tered in the Days-Left field. This field also acts as a counter to indicate how many days are left in the override period.

8.6.3. Overrides

To override one of the 56 possible schedules, the BCU must receive a signal from an override source. If the source signals ON, the ARTC will control the zone according to the occupied mode set points. If the source signals OFF, the normal schedule ON/OFF times will be used. If the source sends an ON command, the schedule override times will be used. Override sources are defined in the Override Source

field and may be any of the five command types listed be-low:

1. Sensor Input Command (ICMD) - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm (ALRM) - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is generated based on a digital or analog signal from the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command (OCMD) - A digi-tal value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Tim-er, Combiner, and Bypass cells.

-SCHEDULE SETUP 12:00 1-Schedule Override 2-Holiday 1 3-Holiday 2 4-Alternate Week 1 5-Alternate Week 2 6-Standard WeekSELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

7-Alternate Week 3 8-Alternate Week 4

Item Description Page

1 Schedule Override 8-21

2,3 Holiday 1 and 2 8-22

4,5,7, 8

Alternate Week 1, 2, 3, and 4 Respectively 8-22

6 Standard Week 8-23

- -ORVD SCHED (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 Copy To Schedule: 01. Days-Left: 00 =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

- - -OVERRIDES (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 Override Source: ICMD 00 000 Overrides This Month (00000 Minutes) 000 Overrides Last Month (00000 Minutes) =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 84: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-22 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

4. Proof Fail Command (PROF) - A digital val-ue issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule (SCHD) - An application indepen-dent of the Sensor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Control in the BCU.

To instruct the BCU to override a schedule, enter the schedule to override in the schedule number field, and enter the command type and source number in the Override Source field. The source number is the Input or Output Module number specified in I/O Control (see Section 8.8.2.).

The Overrides screen also displays the override log. This log shows the amount and duration of overrides acti-vated during the current and previous months.

8.6.4. Holiday 1 and Holiday 2 Screens

ON and OFF operation times for long holidays are de-fined at the Holiday 1 and Holiday 2 screens. When activat-

ed, the holiday schedule takes precedence over both the standard week schedule and the alternate week schedules. To define a Holiday schedule, first, enter the number of the schedule requiring holiday ON/OFF times.

ACTIVE/UNUSED [Unused]

The active flag must be set from one of the six schedule screens to activate the specified system schedule. When the system schedule is active, all defined schedule overrides are also active. Schedule overrides will control the system when set points are defined for the desired override from the Schedule Override screens.

ON/OFF [0000 – 2400] [0000 (Not Defined)]

To define a Holiday 1 schedule for any of the 56 system schedules, enter the number of times in a 24 hour period the schedule should be active.

Copy to Schedule

To activate the same Holiday 1 schedule within other system schedules, enter the target schedules in the Copy to Schedule field.

8.6.5. Alternate Week Screens (Weeks 1–4)

- -

- -

HOLIDAY 1 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy To Schedule: 01. =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

HOLIDAY (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy To Schedule: 01. =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

2

- -ALT WEEK 1 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

Use Alt Week 1:NO

- -ALT WEEK 2 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

Use Alt Week 2:NO

Page 85: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-23

Alternate Weeks are used to plan for known hours per-sonnel will be in the store apart from standard business hours. ON and OFF operation times for these known busi-ness hours are defined in the Alternate Week 1, 2, 3, and 4 screens. ON and OFF operation times may be set for each day of the week. When activated, alternate week schedules take precedence over the standard week schedule. To de-fine an Alternate Week schedule, first, enter the number of the system schedule that requires alternate week ON/OFF times.

ACTIVE/UNUSED [Unused]

The active flag must be set from one of the six schedule screens to activate the specified system schedule. When the

system schedule is active, all defined schedule overrides are also active. Schedule overrides will control the system when set points are defined for the desired override from the Schedule Override screens.

Day [Sunday – Saturday] [Sunday]

To define ON and OFF operation times for a specified day of the week, enter the desired day in the Day field. A copy command is available if several days in the week share the same ON and OFF operation times.

ON/OFF [0000 – 2400] [0000 (Not Defined)]

To define an Alternate 1 schedule for the specified sys-tem schedule, enter the times in a 24 hour period the sched-ule should be active.

Use Alt Week # [YES/NO] [NO]

The Use Alt Week field performs the same function on each of the four different Alt Week screens. In order for a Alt Week schedule to be used, Use Alt Week # field must be set to YES. If the Use Alt Week # field is left as NO or set to NO, whatever device that is looking at the active schedule will not receive the Alt Week information and will continue to operate under the normal active schedule.

Copy

To copy ON and OFF override times of one day of the week to another within this schedule, enter the target days in the Copy field.

Copy to Schedule

To activate the same Alternate 1 schedule within other system schedules, enter the target schedules in the Copy to Schedule field.

8.6.6. Standard Week

Standard ON and OFF operation times for day to day business hours are set in the Standard Week screen. Stan-dard week schedules are the basic schedules. All other de-fined schedules take precedence over the Standard Week schedule.

ACTIVE/UNUSED [Unused]

The active flag must be set from one of the six schedule screens to activate the specified system schedule. When the system schedule is active, all defined schedule overrides are also active. Schedule overrides will control the system when set points are defined for the desired override from the Schedule Override screens.

Day [Sunday – Saturday] [Sunday]

To define ON and OFF operation times for a specified day of the week, enter the desired day in the Day field. A copy command is available if several days in the week share the same ON and OFF operation times.

ON/OFF

To define Standard Week schedule within the specified system schedule, enter the times in a 24 hour period the schedule should be active.

- -

- -

ALT WEEK 3 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

Use Alt Week 3:NO

ALT WEEK 4 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

Use Alt Week 4:NO

- - WEEK 1 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00

UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

STAND

Copy Standard Schedules to ALTERNATE1.

Page 86: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-24 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Copy

To copy ON and OFF override times of one day of the week to another within this schedule, enter the target days in the Copy field.

Copy to Schedule

To activate the same Standard Week schedule within other system schedules, enter the target schedules in the Copy to Schedule field.

8.6.7. Global Date Ranges

8.6.8. Holiday 1 Dates and Holiday 2 Dates

Holiday 1 schedules may be activated by date using the Holiday 1 Dates screen.

Update Every Year [Off/On] [Off]

If the Holiday 1 schedule is the same from year to year, tag the schedule for the BCU to update the schedule after each new year. The Update field is located to the left of each Enter Date field.

Enter Date [00/00/00 – 12/31/99] [00/00/00]

To activate the Holiday 1 schedule according to specif-ic dates, enter the beginning and ending date in the Enter Date field. If no ending date is entered, the schedule will end at midnight of the next day. If the current date is en-tered for the beginning date, the schedule is activated im-mediately.

8.6.9. Alternate Week Dates

Alternate 1 and Alternate 2 schedules may be activated by date in the Alternate Week Dates screen.

Update Every Year [Off/On] [Off]

If the Alternate Week schedules are the same from year to year, tag the schedules for the BCU to update the sched-ules after each new year. The Update field is located to the left of each Enter Date field.

Enter Date [00/00/00 – 12/31/99] [00/00/00]

To activate the Alternate Week 1 or Alternate Week 2 schedules according to specific dates, enter the beginning

-GLOBAL DATE RANGES 12:00 1-Holiday 1 Dates 2-Holiday 2 Dates 3-Alternate Week Dates

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

Item Description Page

1,2 Holiday 1 and 2 Dates 8-24

3 Alternate Week Dates 8-24

- -

- -

HOLIDAY 1 DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

HOLIDAY 2 DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

- -ALTERNATE 1 WEEK DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 ALTERNATE 2 WEEK DATES 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 87: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-25

and ending date in the Enter Date field. If no ending date is entered, the schedule will end at midnight of the next day.

If the current date is entered for the beginning date, the schedule is activated immediately.

8.7. I/O Control

8.8. Inputs

8.8.1. Input Status

Each Sensor Input Module defined within I/O Control is listed according to the module number and name defined at the Input Setup screen (see Section 8.8.7.). Correspond-ing sensor values and sensor commands are also displayed.

No modifications to the sensor controls may be made at this screen.

Value

The Value column displays the current analog or digital value being issued by the Sensor Input Module. This value is called the Sensor Input Value. See Section 6.10.1.1., Sensor Input Module.

Command

The Command column displays the current digital val-ue being issued by the Sensor Input Module. This value is called the Sensor Input Command. See Section 6.10.1.1., Sensor Input Module.

INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Inputs 2-Outputs

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

Item Description Page

1 Input Control 8-25

2 Output Control 8-31

-INPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Input Status 5-Input Logs 2-Input Setup 6-Input Overrides 3-Input Septs 4-Input Alarms ENTER NUMBER 0=MAIN

Item Description Page

1 Input Status 8-25

2 Input Setup 8-26

3 Input Set Points 8-30

4 Input Overrides 8-21

5 Input Logs 9-1

6 Input Alarms 10-3

- -INPUT STATUS 12:00# Name Value Cmd01 I-Sensor01 NONE NONE 02 I-Sensor02 NONE NONE03 I-Sensor03 NONE NONE 04 I-Sensor04 NONE NONE05 I-Sensor05 NONE NONE =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

Page 88: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-26 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.8.2. Input Setup

Up to 48 Sensor Input Modules may be defined within I/O Control. Each module is identified according to type and board address. These module identifiers are defined at the Input Setup screen.

Enter Input Number

The Input Number is a user-defined number that corre-sponds to a specific Sensor Input Module. The Input Num-ber creates a unique identifier for the Sensor Input Module that is then used—together with the Command Type—to identify specific Sensor Input or Digital Output Module commands to be used. To assign a sensor number to a spec-

ified Sensor Input Module, enter a unique input number (1-48) in the Input Number field.

Enter Name

The Sensor Input Module name is a user-defined name that corresponds to the Sensor Input Module number. While the BCU uses various set points to determine the type and location of a particular sensor, the Module Name provides a convenient, easily recognized description of the sensor for the user. The Sensor Input Module Name may not be longer than 15 characters.

Type

The sensor type is the specific type of sensor to be read by the Sensor Input Module. There are approximately 40 sensor types available. The sensor type should be defined according to the physical input connected to the ARTC or 16AI board. To assign a type to a specified Sensor Input Module, enter the appropriate type in the Type field. Users may choose from the sensor types displayed in the follow-ing table or press the period or dash keys on the keypad to scroll through the list on the screen.

- -SETUP (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type:Temp Units:

Board:NONE Board#:00 Point:00

Logging Interval: 005m =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Input Type Description

Temp Temperature input.

OutTemp* Global outside temperature input.

In-Temp Inside temperature input.

RtcSpace Space temperature input.

Counter Used for counting changes of state.

RH-5V Relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 5 volts variable).

OutRH-5V* Global outside relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 5 volts variable).

InRH-5V Inside relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 5 volts variable).

EcnlRH5V* Global economization relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 5 volts variable).

DhmlRH5V* Global dehumidification relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 5 volts variable).

RH-4MA Relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 4-20mA).

OutRH4MA* Global outside relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 4-20mA).

InRH4MA Inside relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 4-20mA).

EcnlRH4MA* Global economization relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 4-20mA).

DhmlRH4MA* Global dehumidification relative humidity sensor input (RH%, 4-20mA).

Dewpt-In Inside dewpoint temperature sensor input.

DewptOut* Global outside dewpoint temperature sensor input.

RefrLeak CPC refrigerant leak detector.

KwAnalog KW analog sensor input (continuous reading).

KwDigitl KW digital sensor input (reads pulses).

Table 8-4 - Available Input Types (*Global Inputs **Virtual Inputs) (Sheet 1 of 2)

Page 89: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-27

Alarm sequences are available for all input types de-fined in I/O Control. However, some input types require an alarm sequence in order to function properly. These input types are ShutDown, Lites-On, Curtail. If any of these in-put types are used in I/O Control, an associated alarm se-quence must be defined at Alarm screen 1 (see Section 10.3.).

When a contact closure is detected within an input de-fined as ShutDown, Lites-On, or Curtail, the BCU activates these override functions regardless of any other control set-tings. ShutDown input contact closure will deactivate all HVAC loads. Lites-On input contact closure will activate all outputs defined as Lights (see Section 8.8.11., Digital Output Setup). Curtail input contact closure will deactivate all HVAC loads setup for curtailment for fifteen minutes (see Section 8.5.5., HVAC RTCs Shed Setup).

Most sensors connected to an input communication board provide data to a specific Sensor Input Module. Only the specified module uses the data received from the con-nected sensor. Global sensor readings are applicable to all areas controlled by the BCU. Global input sensors are used to monitor BCU functions such as lights and outside air and are also used when the BCU cannot find the appropriate sensors for a specified area.

In addition to global input types, virtual input types are also available within I/O Control. Virtual inputs use stored values within the BCU that control the activity of a speci-fied output. Virtual inputs are defined as sensor inputs con-

nected to the BCU; however, virtual inputs are not physically connected to any input board.

Units

The BCU reads a signal from a sensor and compares the signal to the sensor type to determine the correct analog value. Therefore, units of measure are not important to the BCU. As a convenience to the user, a Units field is provid-ed so that analog values displayed on the BCU screen are easily interpreted. Enter the corresponding units of mea-sure for a specified sensor type in the Units field.

Board

The Board field defines the board type where the sensor to be read by the Sensor Input Module is located. Use the period and dash keys to scroll through the list of possible board types (BCU, RTC, 16AI, None). If the Input Type is a virtual input, the Board Type should be BCU.

Board #

The network address of an input communication board is defined by either the network dip switch on the 16AI board or rotary dials on the ARTC (see Section 4.11., Net-work Dip Switches and Rotary Dials (COM A and D only)). The number entered in the Board Number field is used in conjunction with the Board Type above to locate the sensor to be used by the Sensor Input Module. If the In-put Type is a virtual input, no board number is required.

Lite-Lev Analog light level input (reads foot-candles).

Linear Linear input (reads voltage 0-5VDC).

CPC-SW CPC temperature sensor with occupancy override button.

Digital Non-voltage contact closure.

Proof Input sensor that reads closure to determine if equipment is running.

Momentary Reads momentary change of state (open to close or close to open).

MonOnOrv Reads momentary change of state to determine fixed or timed override.

Orvd-On Reads a change of state to determine fixed or timed override.

ShutDown Reads a closure and shuts down all loads (all heating & cooling stages).

Lites-On* Global input that relays ON to all outputs defined as “Lights” on closure.

Curtail Non-voltage contact closure to activate curtailment.

AirMakUp Non-voltage contact closure to activate MakeUp Air.

Enth-SW Non-voltage contact closure from a enthalpy switch.

HumiStat Non-voltage contact closure from a humidistat.

Lite-Dig Non-voltage contact closure from a light level sensor.

Demand** Virtual input that uses an internal demand value to control an output.

Alarm** Virtual input that uses an internal alarm value to control an output.

Occupancy** Virtual input that uses an internal schedule value to control an output.

Hr-Chime** Virtual input that uses an internal time value to control an output.

Table 8-4 - Available Input Types (*Global Inputs **Virtual Inputs) (Sheet 2 of 2)

Page 90: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-28 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

To designate the specific board number of a sensor in-put, enter the appropriate board number in the Board # field.

Point

For an ARTC, each input sensor is physically connect-ed to a predetermined point on the input communication board. On the 16AI board, the point numbers are printed on the board above the input connections. On the ARTC, AX1 is point 1 and AX2 is point 2. Because virtual inputs are not physically connected to any input communication board, no point number is required.

If a pulse input type is connected to a 16AI Board with software older than version E.02, it must be connected to

point 1. In addition, the network dip switch rocker number eight on the 16AI Board must be configured ON or in the up position (see Section 4.16., Input Type Dip Switch Settings).

Logging Interval

The BCU periodically records the values received from the defined input sensors and stores the information in the Input Log (see Section 9.5.). The Logging Interval defines when the data received from the sensor inputs are recorded. The interval range is between 0 and 240 minutes and is de-fined in the Logging Interval field. The BCU will store up to 590 readings for each input.

8.8.3. Combiner

A Sensor Input Module defined using the I/O Setup screen may be combined with up to three other Sensor In-put Modules using the Combiner screen. The Combiner screen provides fields for designating the Input Modules to use and the method for combining the modules. For a com-plete overview of I/O Control refer to Section 6.10., Input/Output Control.

Control [options] [One]

Enter the number of the first Sensor Input Module to be combined in the Input number field. The control method defined in the Control field determines how to combine the values from multiple Sensor Input Modules. This com-bined or control value is then compared to defined set points and commands to determine the operational status of an output. Users may choose from the following six control methods:

For Analog Sensors:

1. ONE - The primary sensor value is the control value.

2. AVG - The BCU calculates the control value

using the average temperature of one or more sensors.

3. MAX - The BCU calculates the control value using the maximum temperature value of one or more sensors.

4. MIN - The BCU calculates the control value using the minimum temperature value of one or more sensors.

For Digital Sensors:

5. AND - If the input sensor reads open and if all of the defined combiner inputs read open, an input command value of ON will be generat-ed. Otherwise, an input command value of OFF will be generated.

6. OR - If the input sensor reads open and if one or more of the combiner inputs read open, an input command value of ON will be generat-ed. Otherwise, an input command value of OFF will be generated.

To control specified BCU functions based on compara-tive Sensor Input Values, enter the control method in the Control field.

Input Selections [0 – 49] [0]

Up to three Sensor Input Modules may be combined with the Input Module defined at the Input Number field. Enter the Sensor Input Modules to be combined in the Input Selections field.

The status of each of the selected inputs is displayed di-rectly below the Input Selections field.

- - -COMBINER (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Control Input Selections (Temp )ONE 01 00 00 00NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 91: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-29

8.8.4. Filter

The Filter cell is used to limit the rate of change of the value leaving the Combiner cell. The Filter cell should only be used by persons having prior experience setting up such cells. For help in setting up a Filter cell, call CPC’s custom-er support number.

Input

Input defines the input module that is being filtered. Once the input number is entered, the Input Type is dis-played.

Enable [YES/NO][NO]

Entering Yes in this field enables the Filter cell; enter-ing No in this field turns off the cell.

Factor [0 – 100%] [100%]

The Factor percentage determines how much the fil-ter’s input will be changed when compared with the desired filter output. Every time that an input changes, the filter will compare the previous output with the current input. After the comparison, the filter will then only allow the new output to be changed a percentage of what the input says it should change.

Interval [2 – 240 sec.] [10 sec.]

The Interval field determines how often the Filter will check what the input is. The Filter can be set to check the input anywhere between 2 and 240 seconds. By default, the Filter will check this value every 10 seconds if enabled.

8.8.5. Adjustment

For each analog Input Type defined at the I/O setup screen, the BCU converts the electrical impulse received from the sensor into a usable value. This adjustment may be fine-tuned using the Adjustment screen. In most cases the offset and gain adjustments made by the BCU are sufficient for proper use of the sensor readings.

Type

The Type field allows the input sensor type to be select-ed. See Section 8.8.2., Input Setup for sensor types.

Offset [-9999 – 9999] [0]

Enter the Input Number of the input to be adjusted in the Input Number field. Offset is used to define the lower boundary of the range of input values that may be read by the Sensor Input Module. Example: if a humidity sensor supplies a 1 to 5 volt signal, which represents a humidity range of 0% to 100%, the Offset value is equal to 1 (1 volt = 0% humidity).

Gain [-999 – 999] [1]

Gain is used to define the upper boundary of the range of input values that may be read by the Sensor Input Mod-ule. Example: if a humidity sensor supplies a 1-5 volt sig-nal, which represents a humidity range of 0% to 100%, the gain value will be 20 (5 volts * 20 = 100% humidity).

Trim [-99 – 99] [0]

At times, a sensor may provide a reading that—when offset and gain values are applied—reads lower or higher than the known condition being monitored. A trim value may be entered to calibrate the sensor to actual conditions.

The status field located directly beneath the Input Num-ber displays the current value as a result of the adjustment calculation.

- - - 2

- - - 3ADJUSTMENT (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type: Temp

INPUT01 = ((V+OFFSET) X GAIN ) + TRIMNONE 00000 00001 00.0

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 92: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-30 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.8.6. kW Set Points

The BCU may use either a kW transducer or a watt-hour transducer to monitor demand. Depending on the transducer used, the appropriate operational information must be entered at the kW Set Points screen.

Analog kW Transducers

Analog kW transducers read the actual kW and send a voltage range defined by a minimum and maximum volt-

age. Enter the minimum and maximum voltage sent by the kW transducer in the appropriate fields if a kW transducer is being used.

To correctly translate the voltage reading into a kW reading, the BCU requires the kW reading when the maxi-mum voltage is being supplied. Enter the kW value at the maximum voltage in the Power @ Maximum field if a kW transducer is being used. The BCU assumes the minimum voltage represents a value of zero.

Digital Watt-Hour Transducers

Digital watt-hour transducers read a pulse supplied by the power company, which represents a fixed number of watt-hours. The BCU uses the watt-hour information to calculate a kW value for use by the Demand Control algo-rithm. Enter the number of watt-hours represented by a sin-gle pulse if a watt-hour transducer is being used.

8.8.7. Input Set Points

Input set points are control parameters stored in the BCU that are compared to sensor readings to determine if the current output function should be activated or deacti-vated.

Type

Enter the Input Number of the desired Sensor Input Module at the Input Number field. The Sensor Type is a status field that displays the type for the Sensor Input Mod-ule selected. The sensor type is defined at the Input Setup screen (see Section 8.8.2.)

Occupancy [options] [Schd 00]

Enter the command type of an input or output module, or a schedule that will be used to establish the occupied mode for the selected Sensor Input Module. Five command types are available.

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value is-

sued by the Sensor Input Module as a final re-sult of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is gen-erated based on a digital or analog signal gen-erated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value is-sued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Com-biner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sensor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Con-trol in the BCU.

To define the occupied mode, enter the command type and source number in the Occupancy field. The source number is the Input or Output Module number specified under I/O Setup (see Section 8.4.12.).

- - - 4KW SETPTS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 ANALOG: Maximum Signal : 05.000 V Minimum Signal : 01.000 V Power @ Maximum: 0100.0 KW DIGITAL: WattHours/Pulse: 0100 WH

=PREV ->=+RTC 0=MENU

- -SET POINTS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type: TempOccupancy: SCHD 00 (NONE)Ctl: NONE Cmd:NONE0: ON@CLSD Dly000s OFF@OPEN Dly000sU: ON@CLSD Dly000s OFF@OPEN Dly000s =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 93: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-31

Control (Ctl)

The Ctl status field displays the current analog or digital value resulting from the combination of modules at the Combiner screen (Section 8.8.3.).

Command (Cmd)

The Command status field displays the current value being issued by the Sensor Input Module based on the oc-cupied or unoccupied set points and the occupancy com-mand.

Occupied Set Points (O) and Unoccupied Set Points (U)

Input sensor set points may be defined as specific val-ues for analog inputs or simply as contact closed or contact

open for digital input sensors. Separate set points are de-fined for occupied (O) or unoccupied (U) status of the fa-cility. To define sensor input set points that are used when the facility is in an occupied mode, enter the appropriate values in the O: fields. To define sensor input set points that are used when the facility is in an unoccupied mode, enter the appropriate values in the U: fields. Cut-in values are en-tered in the ON@ fields and cut-out values are entered in the OFF@ fields.

To activate a time delay for the specified input module, enter the desired time in the Dly fields for the cut-in and cut-out set points for the occupied and unoccupied modes. The units of time may be defined in hours, minutes, or sec-onds by scrolling with the period or dash keys.

8.8.8. Input Overrides

Normal input set points may be bypassed with Input Overrides. The BCU interprets information received from the defined input sensors based on the current stored set points. These set points determine the ON or OFF status of the appropriate outputs. When an input override is activat-ed, the normal system settings that control the outputs are replaced with a user-defined ON or OFF command.

Status [Normal/Bypass On/Bypass Off] [Normal]

The status field displays the current status of the input sensor. This field defaults to NORMAL for normal opera-tion. To initiate an input override, change the NORMAL status to bypass ON or bypass OFF.

The bypass ON status initiates an override and replaces the normal system settings with an ON command. The specified input will then read ON. The bypass OFF status initiates an override and replaces the normal system set-tings with an OFF command. The specified input will then read OFF.

There are two types of overrides: timed and fixed. Timed overrides bypass the input for a specified period of time. Fixed overrides bypass the input until the user returns to this screen and disables the override.

To initiate an override, enter the desired ON or OFF command in the Status field. Also in the Status field, indi-cate the type of override desired. To disable a defined over-ride and return to controlling the defined outputs according to normal system settings, enter normal in the Status field.

Override Timer [Timed/Fixed] [Timed]

The Override Timer is the duration the input will re-main in an override mode if the override is defined as a timed override. The Override Timer may be set in minutes, hours, or days in the Override Timer field. The default for all input overrides is also defined in the Override Timer field.

8.8.9. Output Control

- -OVERRIDES (INPUT 01 Input-01 ) 12:00

Status: NORMAL TIMED Override Timer(Default 060): 000 m

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

-OUTPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Output Status 2-Output Setup 3-Output Proof 4-Output Demand

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

5-Output Logs 6-Output Bypass

Item Description Page

1 Output Status 8-32

2 Output Setup 8-32

3 Output Proof 8-35

4 Output Demand 8-36

5 Output Logs

6 Output Bypass 8-36

Page 94: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-32 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.8.10. Output Status

The Output Status screen displays the current status of the Digital Output Command for every digital output con-tained in the BCU.

Each output module defined within I/O Control is listed according to the output number and output name defined at the Output Setup screen (see Section 8.8.11.). The corre-sponding status of each output is displayed to the right of each output. No modifications to the sensor controls may be made at this screen.

8.8.11. Digital Output Setup

Up to 48 Digital Output Modules may be defined using I/O Control. Each module is defined by an output number, output name, output type, and output location. These out-put identifiers are defined at the Output Setup screen.

Enter Output Number [01 – 48]

The Output Number is a user-defined number that cor-responds to a specific Digital Output Module. The Output Number creates a unique identifier for the Sensor Input Module that is then used—together with the Command Type—to identify specific Digital Output or Sensor Input Module commands to be used by the BCU. To assign a number to a specified Digital Output Module, enter a unique output number (1-48) in the Output Number field.

Enter Name [15 char. max]

The Digital Output Module name is a user-defined name that corresponds to the Digital Output Module num-ber. While the BCU uses various set points to determine the type and location of a particular output, the Module Name provides a convenient, easily recognized description of the output for the user. The Digital Output Module Name may not be longer than 15 characters.

Type [options] [Output]

The Output Type is the specific type of output to be controlled by the Digital Output Module. The Output Type may be either Output or Lights. To assign a type to a spec-ified output sensor, enter the appropriate type in the Type

field. Use the period or dash key to change the type selec-tion.

All outputs defined as Lights will be activated when a contact closure is detected within an input defined as Lites-On (see Section 8.8.2., Input Setup). These outputs will be activated regardless of any other control settings.

Board [options] [None]

The Board field defines the board type where the output to be controlled by the Digital Output Module is located. Use the period and dash keys to scroll through the list of possible board types (8RO, RTC, None). If an 8IO is being used, select 8RO. (The 8IO is a combination input/output board and must be listed as both a 8RO and a 16AI board.)

Board # [1 – 12 or 1 – 32] [00]

The network address of an output communication board is defined by either the network dip switch on the 8RO board or rotary dials on the ARTC or 8IO board (see Section 4.13.1., Network Addresses). The number entered in the Board Number field is used in conjunction with the Board Type above to locate the sensor to be used by the Digital Output Module.

To designate the specific board number of an output, enter the appropriate board number in the Board # field.

Point [1 – 8 or 1 – 2] [00]

Each output is physically connected to a specific point on an output communication board. On the 8RO and 8IO boards, the point numbers are printed on the board adjacent to the output connections. On the ARTC, AUX1 is point 1 and AUX2 is point 2.

RunHrs

A real-time clock within the BCU records the cumula-tive runtimes of each output. The cumulative runtime is the total number of hours each output has been activated for the duration the BCU has been connected. This calculation is displayed in the RunHrs field.

- -

- -SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Type: Output Board:NONE Board#:00 Point:00

RunHrs: 00000 of 00000 Cycles:00000

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU Log Interval: 015 m Type: Value

Page 95: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-33

Cycles

A cycle occurs when an output object is relayed ON and OFF. The Cycles field displays the accumulated number of cycles within the run hours.

Log Interval [0-240 m, h, s] [15 m]

Output from I/O control outputs can now be written to the BCU’s memory. The logging interval can be defined between 0 and 240 minutes, hours, or seconds.

Type [Value, Percent On] [Value]

The Type field describes whether an ON or OFF state-ment or a Percent On Value is sent to the BCU’s log. If Val-ue is selected, ON or OFF will appear next to the log time of the specified output depending on the state of the output at the time the log is made. The log can be viewed at the Output Logs screen (Section 9.5.1., Output Logs).

If Percent On is selected, a value will appear next to the log time of the specified output in the Output Logs screen. This value is the percentage of time during the interval that the output has been ON.

8.8.12. Logic Screen

The BCU may control an output using a single com-mand or the combination of several commands. The Logic screen is used to identify which command types will be used to control an output. To understand the Logic screen in the order that the Output Control algorithm handles the data provided at the Logic screen, the Logic section of the screen must be described first and the Schedule or Method section described last (see figure below).

Logic

The final digital output values of up to four I/O modules or schedules may be logically combined to create a single output control value. The command types may be any of the five types listed below:

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value is-sued by the Sensor Input Module as a final re-sult of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued

by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is gen-erated based on a digital or analog signal gen-erated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value is-sued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Com-biner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sensor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Con-trol in the BCU.

To define the modules to be combined, enter the com-mand type and source number in any or all of the four col-umns below the Logic-Input-Sources heading. The source number is the Input or Output Module, or Schedule number specified under RTC I/O Setup (see Section 8.4.12.).

To define how these module or schedule values will be combined, enter a logic type in the Type field below the Logic heading. The Logic Type may be any of the types listed below:

1. OR - If any of the sensor input commands are ON, the Logic In value will be ON.

2. NOR - The Logic In value is the opposite of the result of the OR function.

3. AND - If all of the sensor input commands are ON, the Logic In value will be ON. Other-wise, the Logic In value will be OFF.

4. NAND - The Logic In value is the opposite of the result of the AND function.

5. XOR - If the two sensor input command val-

- - -

Figure 8-1 - Logic Screen

LOGIC (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00Method: Logic Only Output Occup Logic Logic-Input-SourcesStatus SCHD ICMD ICMD ICMD ICMD 00 OR 00 00 00 00 OFF NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 96: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-34 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

ues are the same, the Logic In value is OFF. If the values are different, the Logic In value is ON.

6. VOTE - If the majority of the sensor input command values are ON, the Logic In value is ON. Otherwise, the Logic In value will be OFF.

Schedule [options] [ICMD]

The value created as a result of the logical combination of these I/O modules, or schedule commands may now be combined with a final I/O module or schedule to create a fi-nal output control value.

The I/O module or schedule to be combined with the logic value created above, may be any of the five command types listed under Logic. Enter the desired command type and number in the column under the Occup heading.

The method used to combine the Logic and Schedule values may be any of the methods listed below:

1. Logic Only - The ON or OFF sensor input command received from the Logic output module is used as the normal output com-mand value.

2. Sched Only - The user-defined occupancy command within the Schedule Interface out-put module is used as the normal output com-mand value.

3. Both ON/Both OFF - The result of the logic calculations and the occupancy command must both be ON to activate the output both OFF to deactivate the output.

4. Both ON/Sched OFF - Both the occupancy command and the result of the logic calcula-tions must be ON to activate the output; how-ever, if the occupancy command is OFF, the output is deactivated.

5. Sched ON/Both OFF - If the occupancy com-mand is ON, the output is activated, but both the logic calculation and the occupancy com-mand must be OFF to deactivate the output.

6. Both ON/Either OFF - Both the occupancy command and logic calculation must be ON to activate the output, but either can be OFF to the output.

To define the appropriate interaction method, enter the desired method in the Method field.

Output Status

The last row on the screen displays the status values for the various fields. The first field displays the final value re-sulting from the combination of values entered in the logic and schedule areas of the Logic screen. The other fields dis-play the status of the input and/or output modules, or sched-ules before they are combined.

8.8.13. Min On/Off

Minimum on and off times can be controlled through the Min On/Off screen. Once the output is selected, a min-imum on time can be assigned to it as well as a minimum off time. These on/off times can be used to help curb short cycling of equipment. Input, Output and State will show the status of the output.

8.8.14. OTMR Setup

The Momentary Start and Stop function within I/O Control will activate an output for a defined period of time based on the transition of the ON/OFF output command value.

Output Timer Type [Momentary Start/Stop/Dis-able] [Disable]

The Output Timer Type should be defined based on when the timer type should activate the load: at the begin-ning of the digital ON signal or at the end. There are two types of output timers: Momentary Start and Momentary

- - - 2 MIN ON/OFF (OUTPUT01 OUTPUT-01 ) 12:00

Min On Time :000 min

Min Off Time:000 min

Input :NONE

Output :OFF

State :Normal

=PREV =SET 0=MENU =NEXT

- - - 3OTMR SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Output Type: Output Output Timer Type: DISABLED Output Timer (Default 000): 000 s

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 97: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-35

Stop. The Momentary Start will activate a specified output when the output command value transitions from an OFF to an ON. The Momentary Stop will activate a specified output when the output command value transitions from an ON to an OFF.

To activate the Momentary Start and Stop function, en-ter the desired output timer type in the Output Timer Type field. To disable the Momentary Start and Stop function, enter Disabled in the Output Timer Type field.

Output Timer [0 – 240 sec.] [0 sec.]

The Output Timer defines the duration that the output will be ON when a value corresponding to the Momentary

On or Off selection is received. This duration will be used to determine when an ON pulse should be ended regardless of any other commands received. To define a timer dura-tion, enter the desired value in the Default field. The field outside of the parentheses is a counter which shows how much time is left on the timer. This value may be increased or decreased as needed.

The final field is the units of time field which may be set to hours, minutes, or seconds by pressing the period or dash key.

8.8.15. Output Proof

The Proofs screen may be used to generate a proof fail alarm or notice when a load controlled by an output module fails to activate. For a complete overview of the Proof Fail function, see Section 6.10.1.2..

Proof Source [options] [ICMD]

The current output command value created within the output module specified at the Output Number field is com-pared to the command type defined under the Proof Source heading. Generally, this command type will be generated by an input module tied to a proof sensor on the load being controlled. The command types may be any of the five list-ed below:

1. Sensor Input Command - A digital value is-sued by the Sensor Input Module as a final re-sult of the interaction between the Hardware Interface, Combiner, Cut In/Cut Out, and Override cells.

2. Sensor Input Alarm - A digital value issued by the Sensor Input Module as a final result of the Process Alarm cell. This value is gen-erated based on a digital or analog signal gen-erated by the Combiner cell.

3. Digital Output Command - A digital value is-

sued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the interaction between the Demand Interface, Schedule Interface, Timer, Com-biner, and Bypass cells.

4. Proof Fail Command - A digital value issued by the Digital Output Module as a final result of the comparison of an actual proof value and a commanded output action.

5. Schedule - An application independent of the Sensor Input and Digital Output Modules which is used to establish on and off times. Schedules are defined using Schedule Con-trol in the BCU.

To define the proof source, enter the command type and source number under the Proof Source heading. The source number is the input or output module, or schedule number specified under RTC I/O Setup (see Section 8.4.12.).

Proof Alarm [Alarm/Notice/Disabled] [Notice]

An alarm or a notice will be generated when the BCU detects an abnormal ON/OFF status within a specified out-put.

To activate the proof alarm function within the BCU, enter the desired alarm type in the Proof Alarm field. To disable the proof alarm function for the specified output, enter disabled in this field.

Proof Delay [0 – 240 sec.] [180 sec.]

The Proof Delay is the specified time in hours, minutes, or seconds the BCU must wait before activating an alarm or notice when the BCU detects an abnormal ON/OFF reading within an output.

To define a Proof Delay, enter the desired duration in the Proof Delay field.

- -

Page 98: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-36 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.8.16. Output Demand

The Output Demand Set Points screen allows the user to control when and if a particular load controlled by a Dig-ital Output Module is allowed to be shed.

Demand Disable Input [0 – 48] [0]

The Demand Disable Input field defines which Sensor Input Value will be used to determine if load shedding may take place for the specified Digital Output Module. Enter the desired output module number in the Output Number field, and the controlling Sensor Input Module in the De-mand Disable Input field.

Minimum Shed Value [-999 – 999, None, Closed, or Open] [None]

The specified digital output module will compare the value issued by the specified Sensor Input Module and the

value entered in the Min Shed Value field. If the Sensor In-put Value is lower than the Min Shed Value, load shed will not occur.

Maximum Shed Value [-999 – 999, None, Closed, or Open] [None]

The specified digital output module will compare the value issued by the specified Sensor Input Module and the value entered in the Max Shed Value field. If the Sensor In-put Value is higher than the Max Shed Value, load shed will not occur.

Maximum Shed Time [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

The specified Digital Output Module may be config-ured to come out of load shed after a specified period of time. Enter the desired duration in the Max Shed Time field.

Minimum NON-Shed Time [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

The specified Digital Output Module that has recently been shed may be configured to remain out of shed for a de-fined period of time before being placed back in shed. Enter the desired duration in the Min Non-Shed Time field.

8.8.17. Output Bypass

The normal output command value may be bypassed at any time. When output bypass is activated, the normal out-put command value is replaced with a user-defined ON or OFF command.

Status

The status field displays the current status of the Digital Output Module. The default is normal for normal opera-tion. During normal operation, the specified output will be activated or deactivated according to the normal Digital

Output Command value. To initiate an output override, change the normal status to bypass ON or bypass OFF.

The bypass ON status initiates an override and replaces the normal output command value with an ON command. The specified output will be activated. The bypass OFF sta-tus initiates an override and replaces the normal output command value with an OFF command. The specified out-put will be deactivated.

There are two types of bypasses: timed and fixed. A timed bypass overrides the normal output command value for a specified period of time. A fixed bypass overrides the normal output command value until the user returns to this screen and disables the bypass.

Bypass Timer [0 – 240] [30 min./hours/days]

The Bypass Timer is the duration the input will remain in bypass mode if the bypass is defined as a timed bypass. The Bypass Timer may be set in minutes (m), hours (h), or days (d) in the Bypass Timer field. The default for all out-put bypasses is also defined in the Bypass Timer field.

- -

- -BYPASS (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Status: NORMAL TIMED Bypass Timer(Default 030): 000 m

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 99: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-37

8.9. System Setup

System variables such as BCU identifiers, the power-up self-test, summer and winter start dates, and user pass-words are defined through the BCU System Setup screens. The System Setup screen is the first of seven screens where such information is entered. The version of software that the controller is running is displayed in the center of the top line.

ID [1 – 39] [1]

The Unit ID number for each BCU is the number that UltraSite™ uses to determine which BCU information is coming from if more than one BCU is being used to control the building.

To define the Unit ID number for each BCU, enter the desired number in the ID field. No two REFLECS control-lers on the same network may have the same ID number.

NAME

The Unit Name is a user-defined identifier that is used to identify the specific BCU on modification and status

screens within UltraSite™. The Unit Name makes it easy for the user to identify the controller in UltraSite.

Month/Day/Year [00/00/00 - 12/31/99]Time [12:00]

The BCU contains a real-time clock that is used when logging information to the various logging screens. It is im-portant that the system date and time be accurate. Many BCU applications use the system date and time to record important information. To set this clock, enter the current date and time in the Date and Time fields. The BCU will automatically set the Day for the entered Date.

Log In Record [Yes/No] [No]

The Log In Record is a record of the users logging into the controller. The BCU will log the user’s name and loca-tion to the BCU Alarm Log. Users may log into the system through the front panel (displayed in the log as FP) or through a remote connection (displayed in the log as RM). User names, passwords, and access levels are defined at the Passwords screens (see Section 8.9.4.).

To activate Log In Record logging, enter YES (Blue "Y") in the Log In Record field.

Power-Up Self-Test [Yes/No] [Yes]

A Power Up Self Test is a self-diagnostics test the con-troller performs during system start-up. This test checks the controller for any problems with the program. This test takes approximately 45 seconds to complete.

Enter a YES (Blue "Y") in the PwrUp SelfTest field to initiate a Power Up Self Test every time the system is start-ed.

8.9.1. Daylight Savings and Temperature Setup

The BCU contains a real-time clock that is used when logging information to the various logging screens. When the current time changes to standard time or to daylight savings time, the BCU’s clock should be modified by one hour. Time changes occur twice a year in most areas. Meth-

ods for defining how the system will change its settings for daylight savings time are defined at the Daylight Savings Setup screen.

Define Daylight Savings By [options] [Date]

Time changes occur at specified times during the year. Time changes to the BCU clock may be made according to these specified times. The clock may be defined to change according to a specific month and week, according to a spe-cific date, or for areas that do not participate in daylight savings time, the clock will not be modified.

To define how the system clock will be changed for daylight savings, enter the appropriate method in the De-fine Daylight Savings By field.

SYSTEM SETUP: v2.00 12:00 ID: 01 NAME: Building Control UnitDate: 03/22/95 Time: 12:00 Day: WED Log In Record: NO PwrUp SelfTest: YES =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

-DAYLIGHT SAVINGS / TEMP. SETUPT 12:00 Define Daylight Savings By: DATE

Month/Week: Spring(04/1) Fall(10/5)

Temperature Unit : Deg F

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Date: Start(04/07/96) End(10/27/96)

Page 100: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-38 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Month/Week [1 – 12 / 1 – 5] [Spring=04/1, Fall=10/5]

If the Month/Week method is chosen in the Define Daylight Savings By field, the BCU will modify the system time during a specified week in a Spring month and again during a specified week in a Fall month. Every year, the BCU will automatically change the system time on the Sunday morning within the specified week at approximate-ly 2:00 a.m.

To activate daylight savings on a specified month and week:

1. Enter "0" for MONTH/WEEK in the Define Daylight Savings By field.

2. Enter the desired month and week in the Spring field.

3. Enter the desired month and week in the Fall field.

Date [00/00/00 – 12/31/99] [Spring=April 7, Fall=October 27]

If the Date method is chosen in the Define Daylight Savings By field, the BCU will modify the system time on the specified dates. BCU system settings will be changed to daylight savings time starting on the date defined in the Start field, and will return to standard time on the date de-fined in the End field.

The date option is primarily used in areas where day-light savings time does not occur every year. Because the defined dates are specific for each year, the Date fields must be updated each year by the user.

To activate daylight savings on the specified date:

1. Enter "1" for DATE in the Define Daylight Savings By field.

2. Enter the desired month, day, and year to be-gin daylight savings time in the Start field.

3. Enter the desired month, day, and year to end daylight savings time in the End field.

None

For areas that do not participate in daylight savings time, the None option is available. If "2" for None is chosen in the Define Daylight Savings By field, the BCU clock will not be modified.

Temperature Unit [Deg. F/Deg. C]

The BCU can display temperature readings in either de-grees Fahrenheit or degrees Centigrade. To select a unit for display, move the cursor to the temperature unit field and press "C" for Centigrade or "F" for degrees Fahrenheit.

If the system is changed to display temperatures in Cen-tigrade, all defaults will be displayed in Centigrade.

8.9.2. Winter/Summer Setup

Most control set points within the BCU are defined sep-arately for Winter and for Summer.

Methods for activating Summer and Winter settings within the BCU are defined at the Winter Summer Setup screen.

Methods include changing the BCU settings by date or by temperature. By date, the settings are changed to the ap-

propriate settings on a specific date. By temperature, the settings change when the outside temperature drops below or exceeds the defined temperature set points.

Summer Start [01/01 – 12/31 or 0° F – 99° F] [05/01 or 60° F]

If controlling by date, enter the month and day the sys-tem should begin using Summer settings. If controlling by temperature, enter the Summer start temperature set point. If the outside temperature exceeds this set point, the Sum-mer settings will be activated.

Winter Start [01/01 – 12/31 or 0° F – 99° F] [10/01 or 50° F]

If controlling by date, enter the month and day the sys-tem should begin using Winter settings. If controlling by temperature, enter the Winter start temperature set point. If the outside temperature falls below this set point, the Win-ter settings will be activated.

- 2WINTER SUMMER SETUP 12:00 Use TEMP to Define Season (WINTER)

Summer Start: 05/01 60F Winter Start: 10/01 50F =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 101: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-39

8.9.3. Alarms Sent to 485 Alarm Panel

Alarms and notices are defined by filter group in Table 8-5. The Send to 485 Alarm Panel screen allows for defini-tion of which alarms and notices will be sent to the 485 Alarm Panel. All alarms default as YES and are sent to the 485 panel unless they are set so that the controller does not send an alarm group.

8.9.4. Passwords

- 3 SEND TO 485 ALARM PANEL 12:00

SYSTEM ALMS :YES POWER ALMS :YES

SENS HI ALMS :YES SENS LO ALMS :YES

SENS FAIL ALMS :YES COMM ALMS :YES

NETWORK ALMS :YES SHUTDOWN ALMS :YES

PROOF ALMS :YES MISC ALMS :YES

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

Alarm Filtering Group Alarm/Notice Messages

Alarm Filtering Group Alarm/Notice Messages

SYSTEM ALMS Setpts CorruptEmergency OffRestore ErrorRTC Code FAILRTC Run FailInvalid Alarm

PROOF ALMS Cmp1 Proof FAILCmp2 Proof FAILCmp3 Proof FAILCmp4 Proof FAILAir Flow FAILProof Failure

POWER ALMS Curtailment OnCurtailment OffDemand High

COMM ALMS Dialout Failed

SENS HI ALMS Occp Space HIGHUnOc Space HIGHHighSupply Air HIGH

SHUTDOWN ALMS Freeze ShutDownSmoke ShutDown

SENS LO ALMS Occp Space LOWUnOc Space LowLowSupply Air LOW

NETWORK ALMS Missed TokenNo ResponseBad MessageBad Checksum

SENS FAIL ALMS Short, OpenSpace Temp OPEN, SHRTSupply Air OPEN, SHRTReturn Air OPEN, SHRTAux 1 Input OPEN, SHRTAux 2 Input OPEN, SHRT

MISC ALMS All Lights OnOpenClosedFreezeStatSmoke DetectedFilter Dirty

Table 8-5-Alarms/Notices by Group

- 4PASSWORDS LEVEL 1 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 100 User 01 User 02 User 03 User 04 =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

- 5PASSWORDS LEVEL 2 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 200 User 05 User 06 User 07 User 08 =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 102: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-40 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

The BCU system requires a password for users to enter into and modify the system. There are four levels of access to the BCU, each of which may be configured with four dif-ferent user names and four corresponding passwords.

PASSWORD

The default passwords for levels 1, 2, 3, and 4 are 100, 200, 300, and 400, respectively. These passwords may be changed at any time to any six character alpha-numeric string. Up to four passwords may be defined.

USER NAME

User names for each defined password are defined in the User Name field. Four user names may be assigned within level one. Each user name may be no more than sev-en characters. If the Log In Record option is chosen in the System Setup screen (Section 8.9.), a defined user name will be logged to the BCU Alarm Log when the corre-sponding password is used to log into the system.

8.10. BCU Configuration

- 6

- 7

PASSWORDS LEVEL 3 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 300 User 09 User 10 User 11 User 12 =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

PASSWORDS LEVEL 4 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 400 User 13 User 14 User 15 User 16=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Level Default Password

Description

1 100 • View system settings• Reset alarms

2 200 100, plus:• Change set points• Change 16AI configuration

3 300 200, plus:• Access and change system

setup• Access I/O, Host, and Remote

Network

4 400 Full access to all BCU functions

BCU CONFIGURATION 12:00 1-16AI Setup 5-Remote Comm 6-Host Network 7-Board Network SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

Item Description Page

1 16AI Setup 8-41

2 Not Used

3 Not Used

4 Not Used

5 Communication Setup 8-41

6 Host Network 8-42

7 Board Network 8-44

Page 103: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-41

8.10.1. 16AI Setup

To properly interact with any environmental control system, the BCU requires constant, accurate system infor-mation. The BCU receives this information through a se-ries of input communication boards.

To activate a 16AI board within the BCU network, des-ignate the appropriate version for each board physically connected to the network.

• If the connected board is version E.02 or higher, in-dicate a YES in the corresponding field.

• If the connected board is a version lower than E.02, indicate a NO in the corresponding field.

All versions of a 16AI Board may be used with BCU 2.0. However, BCU 2.0 contains a new feature that only E.02 version or higher boards can handle. BCU 2.0 controls certain functions using a digital input counter. Version E.02 or higher 16AI boards will accept this digital input counter connected to any of its inputs. When using older version boards, digital input counters may only be connect-ed to input number one. These older boards will only work if defined as lower version boards at this screen.

8.10.2. Communication Setup

The remote communication capability within the BCU allows the user to communicate with a site from a remote location. Remote communication with a site controlled by the BCU is accomplished using UltraSite™, CPC’s remote communication software package. To utilize this BCU function, the network must be connected to a modem di-rectly, or through the RS232 Bus Amplifier.

Remote communication network settings are defined at the Communications Setup screen.

ID

The Unit ID number for each BCU is the number that UltraSite uses to determine which BCU information is coming from if more than one BCU is being used to control the building. No two BCUs may have the same ID number. These numbers are defined at the BCU System Setup screen (see Section 8.9.).

For the specified BCU to communicate properly with the remote communication software, the site ID number must be entered in the ID field.

Baud

Baud rate settings are defined in the Baud field. Most standard Hayes compatible modems with a baud rate of at least 9600 will operate properly with the BCU network. The baud rate should be set according to the type network modem used with the remote network. The BCU is only ca-pable of operating at baud rates of 300, 1200, 2400, and 9600 with 9600 being the preferred rate.

Parity/Data Bits

The BCU automatically calculates the Parity and Data Bits settings required for the remote network to communi-cate properly according to the specified Baud Rate settings. This setting should not be changed. The Parity and Data Bits settings are displayed in the Parity and Data Bits fields.

Dialout Delay

BCU alarms, or high level warnings, are usually ac-companied by an alarm dial-out sequence. The time delay for the dial-out is defined in the Dialout Delay field. The Dialout Time Delay is the amount of time in minutes the unit must wait before activating the call-out sequence. The delay allows an on site user to acknowledge the alarm be-fore it is called out.

To define the dialout time delay, enter the desired time in the Dialout Delay field.

Dialout Phone

Phone numbers to be called when an alarm is generated are defined in the Dialout Phone field. A phone number must be defined in this field to activate the remote dial-out function.

-16AI BOARD SETUP 12:00 Designate Version E.02 or Higher Boards 01 02 03 04 05 06 NO NO NO NO NO NO =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

-RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP 12:00 ID: 01Baud:9600 Parity:NONE Data Bits:8 Dialout Delay : 000 m Dialout Phone #1: #2: =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 104: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-42 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

When an alarm is generated, and after the dialout delay, the dialout sequence begins. If the remote line is busy or there is no answer, the system will dial the first number six times, waiting five minutes before each attempt, until a connection is made. If no connection is made, the system

will dial the second Dialout Phone Number six times, wait-ing five minutes before each attempt. If there is still no con-nection, the system will generate an additional alarm in the BCU Alarm Log (Dial Out Unsuccessful).

8.10.3. Modem Setup

The remote communication capability within the BCU allows the user to communicate with a site from a remote location using a network modem. Modem type, baud rate settings, automatic dial-out functions, and auto-polling fea-tures are defined from the Modem Setup screen.

Modem

CPC offers a standard modem for use with the BCU network. Modem types are defined in the Modem field. The following modem types are available:

1. Hayes, MultiTech

2. Practical Peripheral 2400SA

3. Practical Peripheral 2400SA V42bis

4. Hayes Compatible 24/96/14.4 ASB

5. Generic Modem.

Refer to the modem user’s manual to determine the cor-rect modem type.

Setup

The initialization string for the specified modem is dis-played in the Setup field. The BCU will automatically de-fine the necessary string needed to initialize the modem entered in the Modem field if the modem is known to the BCU. If there is no predefined string displayed in the Setup field, enter the initialization string found in the modem us-er’s manual.

Send

To program the modem, initialize the modem by send-ing the initialization string to the modem in the Send field. The modem’s response will be displayed. The modem should initialize within approximately five seconds after the string is sent. An OK response or a replica of the string is returned to the screen if the modem is properly defined. If a No Response is returned, check the wiring, send the string again, then refer to the trouble-shooting guide in the modem user's manual for suggestions.

Reset Modem at Midnight

To ensure the modem is properly programmed to per-form the BCU’s remote communication functions, send the string to program the modem on a regular basis. To auto-matically send the string every night at midnight, enter YES in the Reset Modem at Midnight field.

8.10.4. Host Network

One of the most important requirements of any network environment is the BCU’s ability to notify personnel of system failures or possible problems. The host, or alarm, network takes all alarms from multiple units in the system and sends them to a 485 Alarm Panel. CPC uses the 485 Alarm Panel to receive signals from the BCU and to deliver annunciated alarms in the event of a serious system prob-lem.

BCU Units are defined to a host or alarm network at the Host Network screens. The status of the host network is displayed and it may be reset at these screens.

- -MODEM SETUP 12:00 Modem: HAYESSetup: AT&FE0S0=1&D2X0&W Send String. Reset Modem at Midnight: NO =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

-

Page 105: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-43

8.10.5. On-line Status of the Host Network

The On-line Status screen displays the status of the Host Network. No modifications to the network may be made at this screen.

Host Net State

The status of the host network is displayed in the Host Net State field. If the network is defined properly on each

controller, this field should read OK. If the network is im-properly configured, this field will read Reconfigure. Fi-nally, if the network is reset OFF, the field will read OFF.

If the field reads Reconfigure, there is a problem with the configuration of the hardware. For more information about hardware configuration, see Section 2, Hardware Overview.

Number Off-line

The status of all units connected to the host network are displayed in the Number Off-line field. A "1" under the specified unit indicates the unit is on-line. A period "." un-der the specified unit indicates the unit is off-line. The BCU calculates the number of defined units currently off-line and displays this calculation in this field. The status of the unit the user is currently logged into is not included in these calculations.

8.10.6. Set Device Numbers

This Controller is Device #

Each BCU must have a defined device number when more than one BCU is controlling the system. No two BCUs may have the same device number.

To define a device number for the current BCU, enter the appropriate device number in the Device # field.

Alarm If Another Device Fails

To activate an alarm if a controller fails, enter "Y" in the Alarm If Another Device Fails field.

Test Host Net for New Devices

The BCU is capable of searching for any new device defined to the host network. To activate this capability, en-ter "Y" in the Test Host Net for New Devices field. This op-tion should be activated at all controllers attached to the host network except for the 485 Alarm Panel.

8.10.7. Reset

The host network is by default not active within the BCU. If one or more BCUs are controlling the system using a 485 Alarm Panel, then the host network must be reset ON at the Reset screen.

To reset the host network ON within the current BCU, enter "2" for Reset ON at the Reset screen.

- -

- -

- -

Page 106: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

8-44 • System Setup 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

8.10.8. Board Network

The Board Network connects all input and output com-munication boards together with the controller using two separate RS485 input/output communication networks. These input and output communication boards are defined to the Board Network at the Board Network screens. The status of each board is also displayed and the network may also be reset from these screens.

8.10.9. On-line Status of the Board Network

The On-line Status screen displays the status of the Board Network. No modifications to the network may be made at this screen.

I/O Bus State

The status of the I/O board network is displayed in the I/O Bus State field. This field reflects if the network is ON or OFF. Modifications to this status may be made at the Re-set screen (see Section 8.10.11.).

Number Off-line

The status of all boards connected to the Board Net-work are displayed in the Number Off-line field. A one "1" under the specified board indicates the board is on-line. A period "." under the specified board indicates the board is off-line. A space under the specified board indicates the board is not defined within the system. For all ARTCs, a "0" indicates the need for new software within the board. The BCU calculates the number of defined boards current-ly off-line and displays this calculation in the Number Off-line field.

8.10.10.Number of I/O Boards

Each Building Control Unit supports up to twelve 8RO Boards and up to six 16AI Boards. To define the number of boards connected to the BCU, enter this number in the cor-responding fields at the Set Device Numbers screen. Defin-ing these numbers allows the BCU to calculate the number of boards within the system. By default, this screen will display the maximum number of 16AI and 8RO boards the BCU may hold, and it displays the current number of 16AI and 8RO boards defined.

-

- -I/O Bus State : ON

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Number Offline : 01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

16AIsRTCsRTCs

8ROs

- -12:00

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Number 8RO Boards(MAX 12, NOW 0):

Number 16AI Boards(MAX 6, NOW 0):

8RO 16AI NETWORK SETUP

Page 107: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual System Setup • 8-45

8.10.11.Resetting the I/O Board Network

The I/O Board Network may be disabled at the Reset screen. If this network is disabled, the BCU may no longer control HVAC functions associated with the unit. After the network is reset OFF, it may also be reset ON at the Reset screen.

To turn off the I/O Board Network, enter "1" for OFF at the Reset screen. To reset the network ON, enter "2" for Reset ON at the Reset screen.

- -

Page 108: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 109: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Logs and Graphs • 9-1

9 Logs and Graphs

9.1. RTC Logs

9.2. Input and Digital Output

The ARTC continuously records occurrences within each zone and stores the information in the ARTC logs. The BCU records the date, time, and the sensor reading for each input sensor based on the logging interval defined un-der the Zone Setup screen (see Section 8.4.3., Control Methods).

The Input and Digital Output Log stores values for the space, supply, and return air temperature inputs and for both auxiliary inputs. The BCU also provides the status of each digital output connected to the ARTC at the same log-ging interval defined for the inputs. The status is recorded as either "1" (ON) or "0" (OFF) in each of the eight col-

umns listed under output on the logging screen. The out-puts are listed from left to right in the following order: Fans, HT1, HT2, CL1, CL2, AX1, AX2, and ECO.

The number of logging points available for each ARTC varies depending on the number of ARTCs connected to the BCU. The number of logging points available are listed in the following table:

After all logging points are taken, new records will overwrite the last or oldest entry in the log.

9.2.1. Analog Output

The ARTC continuously records occurrences within each zone and stores the information in the ARTC logs. The BCU records the date, time, and the sensor reading for each input sensor based on the logging interval defined un-der the Zone Setup screen (see Section 8.4.3., Control Methods).

The Analog Output Log displays the current damper position of an economizer connected to AO1 and AO2. This value is displayed as the percentage the damper is open.

-Item Description Page

1 Input & Digital Output 9-1

2 Analog Output 9-1

3 Runtime Hours 9-2

4 Compressor Cycle Counts 9-2

- - -:

#ENT

# of ARTCs Logging Points

1-6 1250

7-12 545

13-18 415

19-24 310

25-30 250

31-32 205

Table 9-1 - Available Logging Points

- - -:

#ENT

Page 110: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

9-2 • Logs and Graphs 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

The number of logging points available for each ARTC varies depending on the number of ARTCs connected to the BCU. See Table 9-1.

After all logging points are filled, new records will overwrite the oldest entry in the log.

9.2.2. Runtime Hours

The real-time clock within each ARTC records the cu-mulative runtimes of each HVAC stage within each ARTC. These runtimes are logged to the Runtime Hours Log based on the user-defined logging interval. The cumulative runt-ime is the total number of hours each fan or heating or cooling stage has been activated for the duration the ARTC

has been connected or since the last clear runtimes com-mand. The clear runtimes command clears the cumulative runtimes for each HVAC load. To reset the runtimes for any ARTC board, select the appropriate command in the Clear Runtimes field. All runtimes for all loads within an ARTC may be reset or each load may be reset individually.

After the ARTC calculates the cumulative runtime, the percentage runtime is calculated for each load within each ARTC. This value is the percentage of the total ARTC connection time within which the specified ARTC load has been activated.

Both the cumulative and percentage runtimes for fan, and heating and cooling stages are displayed in the Runt-ime Hours screen. Each load is displayed in ascending or-der within the columns listed for each stage.

9.2.3. Compressor Cycle Counts

A counter within each ARTC records the total number of compressor cycles within each ARTC. This value is logged into the Compressor Cycle Counts Log. This counter is automatically reset every night at midnight. The Compressor Cycle Counts Log displays the daily cycle count for each compressor within each ARTC. Daily cycle counts are displayed for the previous six days and for the current day.

9.3. Demand Logs

- -RUNTIME HRS (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00 FANS (%) Heats (%) Cools (%) 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000 00000 000

Clear Runtimes: ALL.

=PREV -=+RTC ->=SET 0=MENU

- -CYCLE COUNTS (RTC01 COMP01) 12:00

03/28 03/29 03/30 03/31 04/01 04/02 0 0 0 0 0 0

Cycles Today:

=MENU ->=+RTC =+COMP (RE) 0=MENU

-

Item Description Page

1 Hourly Log 9-3

2 Daily Demand 9-3

3 Monthly Demand 9-3

4 Demand Window 9-3

5 Daily Demand 9-3

6 Monthly Demand 9-4

Page 111: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Logs and Graphs • 9-3

9.3.1. Hourly LogThe BCU stores an hourly log for up to four power

monitors. Each log is displayed under the corresponding power monitor. Hourly log stores the hourly demand for one hour (the demand is displayed in kilowatts-kW on the screen).

9.3.2. Daily DemandThe BCU stores a daily log for up to four power moni-

tors. Each log is displayed under the corresponding power monitor. Daily demand in the total power demand over one day (the demand is displayed in kilowatts-kW on the screen).

9.3.3. Monthly DemandThe BCU stores a monthly log for up to four power

monitors. Each log is displayed under the corresponding power monitor. Monthly demand is the total power demand over one month (the demand is displayed in kilowatts-kW on the screen ).

9.3.4. Window Log

The Window Log screen displays a summary of the kW usage during the defined Demand Window. The date and time of each log are also displayed.

DEMAND

Demand is the average rate of energy consumption dur-ing the defined Demand Window. The Demand field dis-plays the sum of kW for each interval over the total number of intervals.

kW-PEAK

The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by the kW or watt-hour transducer during a specified period of time. The kW-Peak field displays the highest kW mea-sured by the transducer during the defined Demand Win-dow.

- - HOURLY LOG # 1 of 48 12:00

TIME MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON 4 17:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW16:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 15:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 14:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 000000013:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

KW

KWKWKW

- - DAILY LOG # 1 of 48 12:00

DATE MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON 4 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 000000000/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

KW

KWKWKW

- - MONTHLY LOG # 1 of 48 12:00

MONTH MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON 4 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 000000000/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

KW

KWKWKW

- - -WINDOW LOG # 1 of 1344 12:00 Date Time DEMAND KW-PEAK 00/00 00:00 0000 0000 00/00 00:00 0000 0000 00/00 00:00 0000 0000 00/00 00:00 0000 0000 00/00 00:00 0000 0000

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

Page 112: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

9-4 • Logs and Graphs 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

9.3.5. Daily Log

The Daily Demand Log displays a summary of the kW usage during previous 24 hour periods. KW usage for up to 48 days may be logged in the Daily Demand Log. The date and total kW hours used in the window during the 24 hour period are listed.

DEMAND

Demand is the average rate of energy consumption dur-ing the specified 24 hour period. The Demand field dis-plays the highest average rate over the specified 24 hours and displays the time of the occurrence.

KW-PEAK

The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by a kW or watt-hour transducer during a specified period of time. The kW-Peak field displays the highest kW mea-sured by the transducer during the specified 24 hours and displays the time of the occurrence.

SHED

The Shed field displays the cumulative number of hours the BCU was in shed during the specified 24 hours.

9.3.6. Monthly Log

The Monthly Log displays a summary of the KW usage during previous months for up to 24 months. The date and

total KW hours used in the window during the specified month are also listed.

DEMAND

Demand is the average rate of energy consumption dur-ing the specified month. The Demand field displays the highest average rate over the specified month and displays the time of the occurrence.

KW-PEAK

The peak power is the highest value of kW measured by a kW or watt-hour transducer during a specified period of time. The kW-Peak field displays the highest kW mea-sured by the transducer during the specified month and dis-plays the time of the occurrence.

9.4. Overrides Log

See Section 8.6.3., Overrides

9.5. Sensor Input Logs

Input sensor readings are logged to the Input Log. This historic data is recorded for any of the 48 Sensor Input Modules according to user-selected time intervals. Log-ging intervals are defined at the Input Setup screen (see Section 8.8.2.). The BCU will store up to 590 readings for each input and displays the date and time of each reading.

- - - DAILY LOG # 1 of 48 12:00

DATE KWH DEMAND KW-PEAK SHED 00/00 000000 0000(0000) 0000(0000) 00:0000/00 000000 0000(0000) 0000(0000) 00:00 00/00 000000 0000(0000) 0000(0000) 00:00 00/00 000000 0000(0000) 0000(0000) 00:0000/00 000000 0000(0000) 0000(0000) 00:00 =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

- -

MONTHLY LOG # 1 of 48 12:00MONTH KWH DEMAND KW-PEAK 00/00 0000000 0(0000 00) 0(0000 00)00/00 0000000 0(0000 00) 0(0000 00) 00/00 0000000 0(0000 00) 0(0000 00) 00/00 0000000 0(0000 00) 0(0000 00)00/00 0000000 0(0000 00) 0(0000 00) =PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

- -

Page 113: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Logs and Graphs • 9-5

9.5.1. Output Logs

Output logs may be viewed from the Output Logs screen. Logging can be done either by output state (ON, OFF, or NONE) or by percentage on. See Section 8.8.11., Digital Output Setup for information on selecting log type.

If Percentage On was defined at the Digital Output Set-up screen, the state field will be replaced by a Percent On value. If the Percent On value is 0000.0, the defined digital output is OFF. If the Percent On value is 100.0, the defined digital output is 100% ON.

9.6. BCU Graphs

By selecting any of the options (1-8) from the Graphs screen, a corresponding graph will be built from the respec-tive logs that exist in the BCU.

9.6.1. Control Screen

The Control Screen is displayed while a graph is com-piling. The screen displays the controls for viewing a graph BCU Graphs menu.

9.6.2. View Graph

The View Graph screen displays a compiled graph. Viewing controls such as scrolling, zooming, and exiting to the main menu are active in this screen. To return to the BCU Graphs menu, press "0".

- -PAGE 193/200

12:00

Date Time

01/23 07:34:00

01/23 07:29:00

01/23 07:24:00

0=MENU

01/23 07:19:00

(OUT01 Output-01)

01/23 07:14:00

OFFOFFOFFOFF

OFF=PREV ->=SET (RE)

GRAPHS 12:00 1-RTC Inputs 4-Window KW 2-RTC Runtimes 5-Daily KW 3-BCU Inputs 6-Monthly KW SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

-:

#ENT

-:

#ENT

Page 114: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 115: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Alarms • 10-1

10 Alarms

10.1. Alarm Control

Alarm Control within the BCU includes various func-tions including the generation of alarms or notices when specific sensor readings exceed HI and LO alarm set points or when there is a power failure to the system. The BCU will also activate all lights and turn off all HVAC functions if these specified alarms are selected. These alarm set points are defined at the Alarm Control screen.

Power Fail [Alarm/Notice/Disable] [Notice]

The BCU will generate a notice or an alarm when there is a power failure within the system. A notice is a low-level warning that alerts users of abnormal facility or control sys-tem conditions. A notice creates an entry in the BCU Alarm Log. An alarm is a high-level warning that also alerts users of abnormal facility or control system condi-tions. An alarm will appear in the BCU Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on-site oper-ation of a bell, light, horn, etc. An Alarm may also initiate an alarm dial-out sequence and/or the activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel.

To activate an alarm or notice during a system power failure, enter the desired alarm type in the Power Fail field. To disable this alarm control function, enter Disabled in the Power Fail field.

Lights On [Auto/Lock] [Auto]

The BCU will activate all output modules defined as lights when certain alarms are generated. To activate Lights On, an input module must be defined as Lights On,

and an Occupied Alarm or Notice must be set to Closed within I/O Control (see Section 8.8.7.). When an alarm as-sociated with this input module is generated, the BCU will activate all output modules defined as lights.

Lights On provides two methods for resetting all lights to normal operation: Auto and Lock. In an Auto mode, the Lights On function will be automatically reset when the alarm condition no longer exists. In a lock mode, the Lights On function must be reset manually by entering a "1" in the hidden field to the right of the Lighs On Reset Mode field.

To define the reset command for Lights On:

1. Enter "0" for the Auto mode in the Lights On field.

2. Enter "1" for the Lock mode in the Lights On field.

Shut Down [Lock/Auto] [Auto]

The BCU will also deactivate all HVAC functions within the system when certain alarms are generated. To activate Shut Down, an input module must be defined as Shut Down, and an Occupied Alarm or Notice must be set to Closed within I/O Control (see Section 8.8.7.). When an alarm associated with this input module is generated, the BCU will automatically deactivate all HVAC functions.

Shut Down provides two methods for resetting all HVAC functions to normal operation: Auto and Lock. In an Auto mode, the Shut Down function will be automati-cally reset when the alarm condition no longer exists. In a lock mode, the Shut Down function must be reset manually by entering a "1" in the hidden field to the right of the Shut Down Reset Mode field.

To define the reset command for Shut Down:

1. Enter "0" for the Auto mode in the Lights On field.

2. Enter "1" for the Lock mode in the Lights On field.

SYSTEM ALARMS 12:00 Power Fail: Notice Lights On : AUTO Shut Down : AUTO

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 116: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

10-2 • Alarms 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

10.2. RTC Alarms

The ARTC Alarm Log displays all notices and alarms generated within each ARTC. The log contains 20 loca-tions for entries. Alarms and notices are displayed in order of occurrence with the most current alarm displayed first.

A notice is a low-level warning that signifies an abnor-mal facility or control system condition. A notice creates an entry in an alarm log and initiates no other signal. An alarm is a high-level warning that also signifies abnormal facility or control system conditions. An alarm appears in an alarm log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on-site operation of a bell, light, horn, etc. and may also be accompanied by an alarm dial-out sequence and/or acti-vation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel. All ARTC alarms and notices are also logged to the BCU Alarm Log.

The following alarms may appear in the ARTC Alarm-Log:

-PAGE1 ALARMS (RTC01 RoofTop01 ) 12:00

00/00 00:00 *00/00 00:00 *00/00 00:00 *00/00 00:00 *00/00 00:00 *

=PAGE ->=+RTC 7=ACK 9=ARCHV (RE)0=HVAC

9M

Z

Alarm Description

Occp Space HIGH/LOW An alarm will be generated when the input sensor for space temperature measures a value that ex-ceeds or falls below the user-defined set point for space temperature.

Space Temp OPEN/SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects an open circuit or a shorted circuit at the connec-tion for a space temperature sensor.

Supply Air HIGH/LOW An alarm will be generated when the input sensor for supply air temperature measures a value that exceeds or falls below the user-defined set point for supply air temperature.

Supply Air OPEN/SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects an open circuit or a shorted circuit at the connec-tion for a supply air temperature sensor.

Comp Proof FAIL An alarm will be generated when an ARTC compressor is not found or activated during a stage of cool.

FreezeStat If a freezestat sensor is defined as an auxiliary input, an alarm will be generated when this input sens-es frozen compressor coils within an ARTC.

Smoke Detected If a smoke detector is defined as an auxiliary input, an alarm will be generated when the detector sens-es smoke within an ARTC.

Air Flow FAIL If an air flow input is defined as an input on the ARTC, an alarm will be generated when the BCU does not detect air flow. With this alarm, the BCU deactivates the corresponding fan.

Filter Dirty If a filter alarm sensor is defined as an auxiliary input, an alarm will be generated when the detector senses a dirty filter.

Return Air OPEN/SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects an open circuit or a shorted circuit at the connec-tion for a return air temperature sensor.

Aux1 Input OPEN/SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects an open circuit or a shorted circuit at the connec-tion for an auxiliary 1 input.

Aux2 Input OPEN/SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects an open circuit or a shorted circuit at the connec-tion for an auxiliary 2 input.

Humidity HIGH/LOW An alarm will be generated when the input sensor for the humidity level within a controlled area mea-sures a value that exceeds or falls below the user-defined set point for humidity.

RTC CPC-SW SHRT An alarm will be generated when an ARTC detects a shorted circuit at the connection for an ARTC CPC switch.

UnOc Space HIGH/LOW An alarm will be generated when the input sensor for space temperature measures a value that ex-ceeds or falls below the user-defined set point for the unoccupied space temperature.

RTC Code FAIL An alarm will be generated if the BCU is unable to upload new code to an ARTC.

RTC Run FAIL An alarm will be generated if an ARTC does not respond to new code received from the BCU.

No Response An alarm will be generated if a defined ARTC is off

Table 10-1 - ARTC Alarms

Page 117: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Alarms • 10-3

Unacknowledged alarms are alarms indicated by an as-terisk in the ARTC Alarm Log that are active and must be archived, acknowledged, or reset to silence. When alarms are acknowledged, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the alarms are maintained within the ARTC Alarm Log as acknowledged alarms. These alarms are signified by a dash in the ARTC Alarm Log. If an alarm is acknowl-edged, the same alarm will not be generated or logged again even if the alarm condition continues. When alarms are archived, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the

alarms are maintained within the ARTC Alarm Log as ar-chived alarms. These alarms are signified by a space in the log. If an alarm is archived, the same alarm will generate if the problem occurs again. When alarms are reset, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and all alarm records are cleared at the ARTC Alarm Log.

To acknowledge, archive, or reset the activated alarms within the ARTC Alarm Log, select the appropriate com-mand at the RTC Alarms screen.

10.3. Alarms Screen 1

Alarm Control within the BCU includes the generation of alarms or notices when specific control values exceed HI and LO alarm set points. When the current input sensor reading exceeds the user-defined HI and LO alarm set points, an alarm or notice will be generated.

Sensor Input Module alarms are defined at Alarms Screen 1. Different set points are defined for occupied and unoccupied modes. The occupancy command defined at the Input Set Points screen (see Section 8.8.7.) determines when an input will be in an occupied mode.

Occupied (OC) / Unoccupied (UN)

When control values are received by the BCU from the specified input sensors, they are compared to user-defined

input set points to determine if the BCU should send an ON signal to the appropriate output. This signal is also com-pared to the user-defined HI and LO alarm set points to de-termine if the BCU should generate an alarm or notice. A notice creates an entry in the BCU Alarm Log and initiates no other signal. An alarm is a high-level warning that will appear in the BCU Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a contact closure for on-site operation of a bell, light, horn, etc. An alarm may also initiate an alarm dial-out sequence and/or the activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel.

When the BCU generates an alarm or a notice, it must wait the specified time delay before activating the alarm se-quence. Input sensor alarm set points may be defined as specific values for analog inputs or simply as contact closed or contact open for digital input sensors.

To define input sensor alarm set points and time delays that are used when the facility is in an occupied mode, enter the desired Sensor Input Module number in the Input Num-ber field. Enter the appropriate values in the OC fields. To define input sensor alarm set points and time delays that are used when the facility is in an unoccupied mode, enter the appropriate values in the UN fields.

Bad Message An alarm will be generated if an invalid message is sent from the ARTC to the BCU.

Bad Checksum An alarm will be generated if an invalid message is sent from the ARTC to the BCU.

Invalid Alarm An alarm will be generated if the BCU does not recognize an alarm sequence sent from the ARTC.

Reset Notice A notice will be generated when the ARTC is reset.

Power On Notice A notice will be generated if power to an ARTC is lost and regained.

Device On-line A notice will be generated when an off-line ARTC becomes on-line.

AutoLoad Notice A notice will be generated when the BCU uploads code to an uncoded ARTC.

Alarm Description

Table 10-1 - ARTC Alarms

- -ALARMS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00Type:Temp SCHD00 (NONE) Ctl:NONE

OC ALMS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m NTCS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000mUN ALMS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m NTCS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m =PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 118: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

10-4 • Alarms 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

10.4. Alarms Screen 2

Faulty sensor alarms or notices are generated when the BCU detects a short or an open circuit in an input connec-tion.

Faulty input sensor alarms are defined at Alarms Screen 2. This screen also displays the current input sensor type and current input sensor reading or value.

Faulty Sensor Alarm Control [Alarm/Notice/Dis-able] [Alarm]

When this feature is activated, the BCU automatically looks for faulty readings by the specified input sensor.

If the BCU detects an abnormal sensor reading, it will generate either an alarm or a notice. An alarm will appear in the BCU Alarm Log and may be accompanied by a con-tact closure for on-site operation of a bell, light, horn, etc. An alarm may also initiate an alarm dial-out sequence and/or the activation of the 485 Alarm Annunciator Panel. A notice creates an entry in the BCU Alarm Log and initiates no other signal.

To activate the faulty sensor alarm, enter the desired Sensor Input Module in the Input Number field. Specify which type of alarm the BCU will generate when a faulty sensor is detected. If disabled is chosen, the faulty sensor alarm function will be deactivated.

Faulty Sensor Alarm Delay [0 – 240 min.] [0 min.]

When the BCU generates an alarm or a notice, it must wait a specified period of time, or time delay, before acti-vating the alarm sequence. This delay is defined in the Faulty Sensor Alarm Delay field.

10.5. BCU Alarms

The BCU Alarm Log is similar to other BCU logs in that it records specific occurrences within the BCU accord-ing to the user-defined logging interval and stores the infor-mation for later review. Specifically, the BCU Alarm Log displays all problems occurring in the BCU at any given time.

The BCU Alarm Log displays all notices and alarms generated within the BCU. This log may contain a total of 125 logged alarms or notices. Alarms are displayed in or-der of occurrence with the most current alarm at the top of the first page. A notice is a low-level warning that signifies an abnormal facility or control system condition. A notice creates an entry in the BCU Alarm Log and initiates no oth-er signal. An alarm is a high-level warning that also signi-fies abnormal facility or control system conditions. An alarm appears in the BCU Alarm Log and may be accom-panied by a contact closure for on-site operation of a bell, light, horn, etc. and may also be accompanied by an alarm dial-out sequence and/or activation of the 485 Alarm An-nunciator Panel.

All alarms and notices logged to the ARTC Alarm Log are also logged to the BCU Alarm Log. In addition to

- - -

9M

Z

Page 119: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Alarms • 10-5

ARTC alarms, the following alarms will log to the BCU Alarm Log:

Unacknowledged alarms are alarms indicated by an as-terisk in the BCU Alarm Log that are active and must be ar-chived, acknowledged, or reset. When alarms are acknowledged, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the alarms are maintained within the ARTC Alarm Log as ac-knowledged alarms. These alarms are signified by a dash in the BCU Alarm Log. If an alarm is acknowledged, the same alarm will not be generated or logged again. When alarms are archived, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and the alarms are maintained within the BCU Alarm Log as ar-

chived alarms. These alarms are signified by a space in the log. If an alarm is archived, the same alarm will generate if the problem occurs again. When alarms are reset, all alarm dialouts are discontinued and all alarm records are cleared in the BCU Alarm Log.

To acknowledge, archive, or reset the activated alarms within the BCU Alarm Log, select the appropriate com-mand at the BCU Alarms screen.

Alarm Description

Setpts Corrupt Invalid set points have been detected within the BCU.

Emergency Off A contact closure has been detected at an input defined as Shutdown. See Section 8.8.2., Input Setup

Reset BCU has been reset without a power loss.

Curtailment On A contact closure has been detected at an input defined as Curtailment. See Section 8.8.2., Input Setup, and Sec-tion 8.5.5., HVAC RTCs Shed Setup.

Curtailment Off An alarm will be generated when curtailment is deactivated within the BCU.

Restore Error An alarm will be generated when an error is detected when restoring BCU set points from a backup copy.

Remote Login An alarm will be generated when a specified user logs into the system from a remote location.

Fpanel Login An alarm will be generated when a specified user logs into the system from the front panel.

Power Failed An alarm will be generated when the BCU loses power.

Power Restored A notice will be generated when the BCU regains power.

All Lights On If an All Lights On input is defined on an input communication board, an alarm will be generated when the BCU calls for all lights on.

Proof Failure An alarm will be generated when the BCU detects an output failure within the network.

Short An alarm will be generated when the BCU detects a short in an input connection.

Open An alarm will be generated when the BCU detects an open circuit in an input connection.

Closed An alarm will be generated when the BCU detects a contact closure within a digital input.

High An alarm will be generated when an input sensor reading exceeds a defined maximum set point.

Low An alarm will be generated when an input sensor reading falls below a defined minimum set point.

Dialout Failed An alarm will be generated when the BCU is unable to perform a dialout sequence.

Demand High An alarm will be generated when the measured KW exceeds the demand limit set point.

Host Net Down An alarm will be generated when the BCU cannot connect to the 485 Alarm box or to other defined BCU’s in the network.

Device OnLine A notice will be generated when a new defined or undefined communication board is detected within the network.

No Response An alarm will be generated when the BCU is unable to locate a defined communication board.

Bad Message An alarm will be generated when a problem is detected within the I/O Network.

Bad Checksum An alarm will be generated when a problem is detected within the I/O Network.

Missed Token An alarm will be generated when a problem is detected within the I/O Network.

Table 10-2 - BCU Alarms

Page 120: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 121: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hand-Held Terminal Screens • 11-7

11 Hand-Held Terminal Screens

The operational status and settings of an ARTC Board may be viewed or changed by using a CPC hand-held ter-minal (HHT). When an HHT is plugged into an ARTC, us-ers may access a series of screens that display input and output status information. Certain control parameters, such as offsets, set points, and dead bands, may also be changed in these screens. The HHT may also be used to initiate cooling, heating, fan, auxiliary, and economizer overrides.

The UP and DOWN keys on the HHT keypad are used to scroll through the screens. The DOWN key scrolls for-ward through the screens, and the UP key scrolls backward.

Some screens will have fields that may be changed us-ing the HHT. To change the value in a field, press the RIGHT arrow key. A cursor will appear in the screen next to the first changeable field in the display. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor to the desired field, and enter the desired value using the numeric keypad or se-lect an option using the dash "—" key. When finished, use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to move the cursor off the screen.

At any screen, the F1 key may be used to call up a brief description of the screen’s function. To exit the help screen, press any key on the keypad. The following sections show the HHT screens for all ARTC types currently available.

Page 122: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

11-8 • Hand-Held Terminal Screens 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

11.1. RTC Main Menu

11.2. Status Menu

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

1 - Status: Brings up the status menu.2 - Control: Brings up the control menu.

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

1 - Inputs: The status of ARTC inputs may be viewed at these screens.2 - Outputs: The status of ARTC outputs may be viewed at these screens.3 - Runtimes: The runtimes of ARTC fans, cooling and heating stages, and

auxiliary outputs may be viewed at these screens.4 - Misc: Miscellaneous ARTC information may be viewed at these screens.

- Temp: The current space temperature reading.Wint/Summ: Whether the ARTC is operating in Summer or Winter mode.Sp: The current supply air temperature reading.Rt: The current return air temperature reading.The last two lines of the display show the current status of auxiliary inputs 1

and 2. To define auxiliary input types, see Section 8.4.12.

- - Outside: The current outside temperature reading.Ctrl Temp: The current control temperature value.CL1/CL2: The status of cooling stage proofs 1 and 2.Air Flow: The status of the air flow switch.

- Fan: Status of the fan output.H1/H2: Status of heating stages 1 and 2.C1/C2: Status of cooling stages 1 and 2.Occ: Shows wheter the outputs are operating in occupied or unoccupied

mode.AX1/AX2: Status of auxiliary outputs 1 and 2.ECO: Status of the digital economizer output.

- - PC: The number of minutes the ARTC has determined to be necessary for an Optimum Start Duration. See Section 8.4.4., Zone Schedule Setup, for more information on Optimum Start/Stop.

OS: The number of minutes in the ARTC’s Optimum Stop Duration. This val-ue will remain fixed at 15 minutes. See Section 8.4.4., Zone Schedule Set-up, for more information on Optimum Start/Stop.

Dehum: Number of cools being used for dehumidification purposes.Analog Out 1/2: Output percentages of analog outputs 1 and 2.

- - 2Make-Up Air: Whether the make-up air strategy is active or inactive.Timer: Number of minutes left on the Make-Up Air timer. The number in pa-

renthesis is the defined Make-Up Air set point. See Section 8.4.16.Dampr Offset: Percentage of damper offset during makeup mode. See Section

8.4.16.

RTC MAIN MENU 1 - STATUS 2 - CONTROLUSE F1 FOR HELP

STATUS MENU 1-INPUTS 3-RUNTM2-OUTPTS 4-MISC

TEMP OPEN WINTSP OPEN RT OPENSpaceTmp2 OPENSpaceTmp2 OPEN

Outside ..... Ctrl Temp OPEN CL1:.. CL2:..AIR FLOW:..

FAN H1 H2 C1 C2 .. .. .. .. .. OCC AX1 AX2 ECO ON .. .. ..

PC(30) OS(15) DEHUM ..ANALOG OUT1 000%ANALOG OUT2 000%

Make-Up Air INACTIVETimer 000 (10)Dampr Offset 000

Page 123: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hand-Held Terminal Screens • 11-9

11.3. Control Menu

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

- Comp1 and Comp2: Number of hours cooling stages 1 and 2 have been active. The percentages show the percentage of operation since the last time runt-imes were cleared.

- - Heat 1 and Heat 2: Number of hours heating stages 1 and 2 have been active. The percentages show the percentage of operation since the last time runt-imes were cleared.

- - 2Fan: Number of hours the fan has been active. The percentage shows the per-

centage of operation since the last time runtimes were cleared.

- - 3Auxiliary 1 and 2: Number of hours auxiliary outputs 1 and 2 have been ac-

tive. The percentages show the percentage of operation since the last time runtimes were cleared.

- Screens within the Misc. Status menu are used by service technicians to trou-bleshoot ARTCs.

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

1 - Setpts: ARTC set points may be changed using these screens.2 - Scheds: ARTC schedules may be changed and schedule overrides may be

ordered using these screens.3 - Setup: ARTC setup information may be entered using these screens.4 - Override: Inputs and outputs may be overridden and run times may be re-

set using these screens.

- Occupied and unoccupied summer and winter set points may be viewed and changed at this screen. See Section 8.4.5. for more information.

- - Dead bands, on delays, and off delays for heating and cooling set points may be viewed and changed at this screen. See Section 8.4.5. for more informa-tion.

COMP1 00000hrs 000% of time COMP2 00000hrs 000% of time

HEAT1 00000hrs 000% of time HEAT2 00000hrs 000% 0f time

FAN 00000hrs 000% of time

AX1 00000hrs 000% of time AX2 00000hrs 000% of time

ARTC 2.200OFFLINE BAUD: 0000 NET CTR:00000 LAST MSG: 00

CONTROL MENU

1-SETPTS 3-SETUP2-SCHEDS 4-OVRRD

SUMMER WINTER OC UN OC UNHT: 70 64 72 66CL: 74 78 76 80

DEAD DELAYS BAND ON OFFHT: 02 03 00CL: 02 03 01

Page 124: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

11-10 • Hand-Held Terminal Screens 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

- - 2If temperature is being used as the summer/winter switch-over control value

(see Section 8.4.5.), the summer and winter set points may be entered at this screen. Seasonal lockouts for heat and cool may be enabled or disabled by choosing YES or NO in the HEAT and COOL fields.

- - 3Alarm setpoints for occupied and unoccupied space temperatures and supply

air temperatures may be set at this screen. See Section 8.4.8., Alarm Set Points, for more information.

- - 4Dehumidification and humidification set points, dead bands for these set

points, and minimum building temperatures may be viewed and changed at this screen. See Section 8.4.6., RH% Inside, for more information.

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

SEASONAL LOCKOUTSUM(60) HEAT:NOWIN(50) COOL:NO

ALM SPTS LO HIOCC SPAC 055 085UNO SPAC 000 075 SUPPLY 040 095

OCC UNODEHUM 55% 65%HUMIDIFY 30% 00%DB: 04 MIN: 70F

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

- The standard week schedule, as described in Section 8.6.6., Standard Week, may be set using this screen. Days of the week are chosen in the field at the top left, and times are entered in 24 hour format in the OCPD and UNOC fields. If temperature is being used as a schedule control value, the temper-ature set point may be entered in the TEMP field.

If desired, the BCU’s Optimum Start/Stop feature may be used on any of the OCPD and UNOC times. To activate OSS, move the cursor to the field di-rectly to the left of the OCPD or UNOC field and press the dash "—" key. An asterisk should appear in this field, signifying that OSS is active. See Section 8.4.4., Zone Schedule Setup, for more information.

- - Overrides of the occupied/unoccupied status of an ARTC may be configured and ordered using this screen. The Timer-Default field shows the default length of an occupied/unoccupied override. If desired, an override can be ordered for a set number of minutes by entering a time in the Timer field.

- SPC, SP, RT, P12, AF: Shows whether the space temp, supply air, return air, compressor 1 proof, compressor 2 proof, and air flow inputs are present (1) or absent (0). These values may be changed by moving the cursor to the field and pressing the dash "—" key.

AUX1/AUX2: The auxiliary input types may be chosen by entering a two-digit code in this field. See Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup, for a description of codes.

- - FN, H1, H2, C1, C2, ECO: Shows whether the fan, heat stage 1, heat stage 2, cool stage 1, cool stage 2, and economizer outputs are present (1) or absent (0). These values may be changed by moving the cursor to the field and pressing the dash "—" key.

AUX1/AUX2: The auxiliary output types may be chosen by entering a two-digit code in this field. See Section 8.4.12., RTC I/O Setup, for a descrip-tion of codes.

- - 2TYP: Shows whether the analog economizer outputs (A01 and A02) are

present (01) or absent (00). To change the value, enter "1" or "0" in this field.

MIN%: The minimum position the economizers A01 and A02 should stay open on a call to close is entered in this field. See Section 8.4.13., Analog Output Setup, for more.

MODE: The mode setting determines at what times the economizer damper is allowed to modulate to the minimum percentage. See Section 8.4.13., An-alog Output Setup, for more.

TUE OCPD UNOC 0000 0000TEMP OCPD UNOC 0000 0000

OCPD OVERRIDETimer-Default 060 MINTimer 000 MIN

INPUT SETUPSPC SP RT P12 AF 1 1 1 0 0 0AUX1 00 AUX2 00

OUTPUT SETUPFN H1-2 C1-2 ECO 0 1 1 1 1 0AUX1 00 AUX2 00

ANLG OUTPUTS TYP MIN% MODEAO1 00 00 00AO2 00 00 00

Page 125: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual Hand-Held Terminal Screens • 11-11

- - 3ARTCs modulate economizer dampers by sending appropriate voltages to the

analog economizers. By default, the outputs will modulate from 0-10VDC. To specify a different voltage range, enter values in the MINV and MAXV fields.

- - 4Fanmode OCC/UNO: The occupied and unoccupied fan modes. See Section

8.4.3., Control Methods, for more information.Dehum Cools: Number of cool stages available for dehumidification.

- - 5Time: The current time, in 24-hour format.Date: The current date, in month/day/year format.Day: The current day of the week.

- - 6Daylight Savings: Whether automatic daylight savings time set back is dis-

abled or following a month/week schedule.Spring/Fall: If the ARTC is set up to change the times on specific days of the

year, enter the dates in the Spring and Fall fields.

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

ANLG OUTPUTS MINV MAXVAO1 00.0 10.0AO2 00.0 10.0

MISC SETUPFANMODE OCC:AUTOFANMODE UNO:AUTODEHUM COOLS: 01

SYSTEM TIME: 0339 DATE: 00/00/00 DAY: MON

DAYLT SAVINGS DISABLEDSPRING: 04/02/95 FALL: 10/29/95

Road Map from RTC Main Menu

Menu Description

- - 7Use ___ to Define Season: Whether the date or the outside temperature is be-

ing used as the summer/winter switch-over control value.Summer/Winter: If the date is being used as the summer/winter switch-over

control value, the month and the day of the switch-overs must be entered in the Summer/Winter fields. If temperature is being used as the control value, enter the temperature set points in the rightmost Summer/Winter fields.

- All ARTC outputs shown in this screen may be bypassed ON, OFF, or re-turned to normal by moving the cursor to the field and selecting "ON", "OFF", or "NOR" by pressing the dash "—" key.

- - Analog outputs A01 and A02 may be bypassed ON, OFF, or returned to nor-mal by moving the cursor to the field and selecting "ON", "OFF", or "NOR" by pressing the dash "—" key. When ordering an "ON" override, specify the ON percentage of the output in the Override % field.

- - 2Runtime statistics for the fan, heating, cooling, and auxiliary outputs may be

cleared using this screen. To clear a runtime, move the cursor to a field un-derneath the output name and press the dash "—" key. The letters "CL" will appear. To confirm the runtime reset, press ENTER; to cancel the runtime reset, press the period "." key.

- - 3Reset Alarms: To reset all alarms for this ARTC, move the cursor to the field

next to the Reset Alarms message and press the dash key. The letters "CL" will appear. To confirm the alarm reset, press ENTER; to cancel the runt-ime reset, press the period "." key.

Reset Setpts: If desired, all ARTC set points may be cleared and returned to normal default values by moving the cursor to the field next to the Reset Setpts message and pressing the dash key. The letters "CL" will appear. To confirm the alarm reset, press ENTER; to cancel the runtime reset, press the period "." key.

Use TEMPTo Define SeasonSUMMER: 05/01 60WINTER: 10/01 50

FAN HT1 HT2 CL1 NOR NOR NOR NOR CL2 AX1 AX2 ECO NOR NOR NOR NOR

ANLG OVERRIDE %AO1 000AO2 000

RUNTIME RESETFAN H1 H2 C1 C2

AX1 AX2

RESET ALARMS

RESET SETPTS

Page 126: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 127: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BEC I&O Manual A-1

Appendix A–Troubleshooting Guide for the BCU

If you have other problems or need additional suggestions for correcting your problems call CPC’s technical support at 1(800)829-2724.

Problem Possible Cause(s) RemedyNo front display • Screen Saver is running

• No main power

• Contrast is set too low

• The screen’s ribbon cable is disconnected

• A fuse is blown

• Touch any key to light screen

• Open unit and make sure power is on (S1 on PIB) and the screen’s ribbon cable is securely connected to both boards, adjust the con-trast

• Check L1 and L2 for rated voltage (connector TB6 on PIB board)

• Check or replace fuse to main controller

• Swap power interface boards

BCU starts but will not control devices • I/O boards are offline

• BCU not programmed cor-rectly

• Check that I/O board is defined within the BCU (Section 8.4.2.)

• Check that network switches are set correctly (Section 4.13.)

• Check that terminating jumpers are set correctly (Section 4.10.)

• Reset board by cycling power

• Check the power supply on board

• Check the network wiring

• Swap boards if necessary

All sensors read open • I/O boards are offline

• BCU not programmed cor-rectly

• Check that I/O board is defined within the BCU (Section 8.4.2.)

• Check that network switches are set correctly (Section 4.13.)

• Check that terminating jumpers are set correctly (Section 4.10.)

• Reset board by cycling power

• Check the power supply on board

• Check the network wiring

• Swap boards if necessary

Temperature sensor not reading properly • Input switch not set properly • Check that input dip switch is in the up position (Section 5.5.)

• Check that Temp sensor is relaying the correct resistance, replace Temp sensor if necessary

BCU will not communicate with 485 Alarm Panel

• Host network is not activated

• Switch on BCU processor is not set propterly

• Network wiring is not correct

• Reset the host network within the BCU

• Make sure S1 on the processor board has dip switches 1 and 5 in the up position

• Check the host network wiring (Section 4.3.)

BCU will not communicate remotely • Baud rate is not set correctly

• Parity and Data Bits are not set correctly

• Incorrect modem string in BCU

• Wiring is incorrect on COM C

• Check that baud rate is set properly

• Check that parity is set to none and data bits are set to 8 under remote communication

• Call CPC for brand/type specific modem string to use

• Check that the modem cable is wired to COM C on the PIB

BCU resets • Low voltage

• Faulty power interface board

• Faulty processor board

• Power Spikes

• Check L1 and L2 for rated voltage, connector TB6 on PIB board. If low voltage, try plugging in a zip cord and plugging into a wall outlet. DO NOT leave this as permanent installation.

• Swap PIB board with another rack to see if the problem persists. Replace original board if necessary.

• Swap processor boards. Take caution in handling the board due to the potential to lose the existing program. Call CPC’s technical support for help in this procedure—1(800)829-2724.

Page 128: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 129: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual B-1

Appendix B–BCU Technical Specifications

Component Technical Specification

Dimensions 10" Wide x 12 1/4" High x 4 1/8" Deep

Weight Approx. 7.0 lbs.

Operating Environment Temperature: -20° F to 120° F; Humidity: 0-95% non-condensing

Display Panel 40 column x 8 line, back lit LCD

Power Input 120 V AC / 208 V AC Selectable, 48 Watts Maximum

Keypad Full Alpha/Numeric Keypad With Directional Arrows

Communications Three RS485 (COM A, COM B & COM D) NetworksOne RS485 (COM C) Networks

Battery Backup 10 Year Life With Minimum 24 hours and Memory Backup Minimum 6 weeks

Page 130: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 131: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual C-1

Appendix C–BCU Front Panel Screens

2-Monitor Daily 5-Demand Daily 3-Monitor Monthly 6-Demand Monthly

1-Monitor Hourly 4-Demand Window

POWER

HOURLY LOG # 1 of 48 TIME MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON4 15:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 14:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 13:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 12:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 11:00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW

DAILY LOG # 1 of 48 DATE MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON4 02/27 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW

MONTHLY LOG # 1 of 48 MONTH MON 1 MON 2 MON 3 MON4 02/98 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW 00/00 0000000 0000000 0000000 0000000 KW

Page 132: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

C-2 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

SYSTEM ALARMS 12:00 Power Fail: Notice Lights On : AUTO Shut Down : AUTO

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

SYSTEM SETUP: v2.00 12:00 ID: 01 NAME: Building Control UnitDate: 03/22/95 Time: 12:00 Day: WED Log In Record: NO PwrUp SelfTest: YES

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

WINTER SUMMER SETUP 12:00 Use TEMP to Define Season (WINTER)

Summer Start: 05/01 60F Winter Start: 10/01 50F

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

PASSWORDS LEVEL 1 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 100 User 01 User 02 User 03 User 04

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

PASSWORDS LEVEL 2 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 200 User 05 User 06 User 07 User 08

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

PASSWORDS LEVEL 3 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 300 User 09 User 10 User 11 User 12

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

PASSWORDS LEVEL 4 12:00 PASSWORD USER NAME 400 User 13 User 14 User 15 User 16

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

BCU CONFIGURATION 12:00 1-16AI Setup 5-Remote Comm 6-Host Network 7-Board Network

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

16AI BOARD SETUP 12:00 Designate Version E.02 or Higher Boards 01 02 03 04 05 06 NO NO NO NO NO NO

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

RS-232 COMMUNICATIONS SETUP 12:00 ID: 01Baud:9600 Parity:NONE Data Bits:8 Dialout Delay : 000 m Dialout Phone #1: #2:

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

MODEM SETUP 12:00 Modem: HAYESSetup: AT&FE0S0=1&D2X0&W Send String. Reset Modem at Midnight: NO

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

HOST NETWORK MENU - 12:00 1-ONLINE Status 3-Reset 2-Set Device #'s

0=Menu

Host Net State : ONNumber Offline : 0

RMCC 2 RMCC 3 485A 1

HOST BUS DEVICES 12:00 This Controller is Device # 1 : Alarm If Another Device Fails (N): Test Host Net for New Devices (N):

12:00 HOST NETWORK1) OFF 2) Reset (ON)

I/O BOARD MENU - 12:00 1-ONLINE Status 3-Reset 2-Set Device #'s

0=Menu

I/O Bus State : ON 12:00 Number Offline : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 68ROs 116AIs 1 4AOsCCBS Total 0 , Online 0

I/O BOARD DEVICE NUMBERS 12:00

Number 8RO Boards(MAX 16, NOW 0):

Number 16AI Boards(Max 8, NOW 0): Number 4AO Boards(MAX 1, NOW 0):

12:00 I/O BOARD NETWORK1) OFF 2) Reset (ON)

GRAPHS 12:00 1-RTC Inputs 4-Window KW 2-RTC Runtimes 5-Daily KW 3-BCU Inputs 6-Monthly KW

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

CU

SEND TO 485 ALARM PANEL 12:00

SYSTEM ALMS :YES POWER ALMS :YES

SENS HI ALMS :YES SENS LO ALMS :YES

SENS FAIL ALMS :YES COMM ALMS :YES

NETWORK ALMS :YES SHUTDOWN ALMS :YES

PROOF ALMS :YES MISC ALMS :YES

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

DAYLIGHT SAVINGS / TEMP. SETUPT 12:00 Define Daylight Savings By: DATE

Month/Week: Spring(04/1) Fall(10/5)

Temperature Unit : Deg F

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Date: Start(04/07/96) End(10/27/96)

Page 133: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual C-3

SCHEDULE CONTROL 12:00 1-Schedule SetUp 2-Global Date Ranges

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

SCHEDULE SETUP 12:00 1-Schedule Override 2-Holiday 1 3-Holiday 2 4-Alternate Week 1 5-Alternate Week 2 6-Standard WeekSELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

ORVD SCHED (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 ACTIVE ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000 Copy To Schedule: 01. Days-Left: 00

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

OVERRIDES (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 Override Source: ICMD 00 000 Overrides This Month (00000 Minutes)000 Overrides Last Month (00000 Minutes)

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

HOLIDAY 2 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy To Schedule: 01.

HOLIDAY 1 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED ON OFF ON OFF 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy To Schedule: 01. =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

STAND WEEK (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01.Copy Standard Schedules to ALTERNATE1. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

ALT WEEK 3 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

ALT WEEK 4 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

GLOBAL DATE RANGES 12:00 1-Holiday 1 Dates 2-Holiday 2 Dates 3-Alternate Week Dates

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

HOLIDAY 2 DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00

HOLIDAY 1 DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU =PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

ALTERNATE 1 WEEK DATES 12:00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 ALTERNATE 2 WEEK DATES 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00 00/00/00-00/00/00

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

INPUT/OUTPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Inputs 2-Outputs

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

INPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Input Status 5-Input Logs 2-Input Setup 6-Input Overrides 3-Input Septs 4-Input Alarms

ENTER NUMBER 0=MAIN

INPUT STATUS 12:00# Name Value Cmd01 I-Sensor01 NONE NONE 02 I-Sensor02 NONE NONE03 I-Sensor03 NONE NONE 04 I-Sensor04 NONE NONE05 I-Sensor05 NONE NONE

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

SETUP (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type:Temp Units:

Board:NONE Board#:00 Point:00 Logging Interval: 005m

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

COMBINER (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Control Input Selections (Temp )ONE 01 00 00 00NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

ADJUSTMENT (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type: Temp

INPUT01 = ((V+OFFSET) X GAIN ) + TRIMNONE 00000 00001 00.0

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

KW SETPTS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 ANALOG: Maximum Signal : 05.000 V Minimum Signal : 01.000 V Power @ Maximum: 0100.0 KW DIGITAL: WattHours/Pulse: 0100 WH

=PREV ->=+RTC 0=MENU

SET POINTS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Type: TempOccupancy: SCHD 00 (NONE)Ctl: NONE Cmd:NONE0: ON@CLSD Dly000s OFF@OPEN Dly000sU: ON@CLSD Dly000s OFF@OPEN Dly000s

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

ALARMS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00Type:Temp SCHD00 (NONE) Ctl:NONE

OC ALMS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m NTCS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000mUN ALMS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m NTCS: HIGH@ NONE Low@ NONE Dly000m

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

ALARMS (INPUT01 Input-01 ) 12:00

Type:Temp Sensor Val: NONE Faulty Sensor Alarm Control: Notice Faulty Sensor Alarm Delay : 000

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

PAGE 001/200 (SEN01 Input-01 ) 12:00Date Time 00/00 00:00 NONE 00/00 00:00 NONE 00/00 00:00 NONE00/00 00:00 NONE00/00 00:00 NONE

=PREV =NEXT (RE) 0=MENU

OVERRIDES (INPUT 01 Input-01 ) 12:00 Status: NORMAL TIMED Override Timer(Default 060): 000 m

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

OUTPUT CONTROL 12:00 1-Output Status 2-Output Setup 3-Output Proof 4-Output Demand

5-Output Logs

SELECT NUMBER 0=MAIN

OUTPUT STATUS 12:00# Name Status01 O-Output-01 NONE 02 O-Output-02 NONE03 O-Output-03 NONE 04 O-Output-04 NONE05 O-Output-05 NONE

=PREV =NEXT 0=MENU

SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Type:Output Board:NONE Board#:00 Point:00

RunHrs: 00000 of 00000 Cycles:00000

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

LOGIC (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00Method: Logic Only Output Occup Logic Logic-Input-SourcesStatus SCHD ICMD ICMD ICMD ICMD 00 OR 00 00 00 00 OFF NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

OTMR SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Output Type: Output Output Timer Type: DISABLED Output Timer (Default 000): 000 s

OTMR SETUP (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Output Type: Output Output Timer Type: DISABLED Output Timer (Default 000): 000 s

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

PROOFS (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Proof Source Output Type : Output ICMD Proof Status: NONE 00 Proof Alarm : Notice NONE Proof Delay : 180 s

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

SETPTS (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Demand Disable Input: 00 Min Shed Value : NONE Max Shed Value : NONE Max Shed Time : 000 m Min NON-Shed Time : 000 m

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

PAGE 001/200 (OUT01 Output-01 ) 15:51 Date TIME 01/28 15:26:00 OFF

=PREV =NEXT (RE 0=MENU

FILTER (INPUT01 INPUT-01 ) 12:00Input Type :Temp Enable :NO Factor % :100.0 Interval :010

Input Value:NONE Filter Output:NONE

=PREV =SET 0=MENU =NEXT 6-Output Bypass

Log Interval : 240 m Type: VALUE

BYPASS (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Status: NORMAL TIMED Bypass Timer(Default 030): 000 m

=PREV ->=SET 0=MENU

01/28 11:26:00 OFF 01/28 07:26:00 OFF 01/28 03:26:00 OFF 01/27 23:26:00 OFF

ALT WEEK 1 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

ALT WEEK 2 (SCHD01 Sched-01) 12:00 UNUSED DAY ON OFF ON OFF SUN 0000 0000 0000 0000

Copy MON To M-F. Copy To Sched: 01. =PREV ->=SET -=+SCHED (RE) 0=MENU

Use Alt Week 1:YES Use Alt Week 2:YES Use Alt Week 3:YES Use Alt Week 4:YES

MIN ON/OFF (OUTPUT01 Output-01 ) 12:00 Min Off Time:000 min Min On Time :000 min

Input :NONE Output :OFF State :Normal

=PREV =NEXT ->=SET 0=MENU

Page 134: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 135: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual D-1

Appendix D–Sensor Hardware/Software Setup Table

How to Use This Table

Table D-1 lists all sensors commonly used in an RMCC setup by both name and part number. The table divides sen-sor setup for each sensor into five different steps, each of which is represented by a column in the table. The columns are as follows:

• Input Dip Switch - the position of the 16AI or 8IO dip switch rocker that corresponds to the input point to which the sensor will be connected.

• Voltage to Sensor - the voltage, if any, required to power the sensor.

• Type - the sensor type that must be selected when setting up the sensor in the sensor software.

• Typical Settings - This column contains typical alarm set points, sensor cut-on and cut-off set points, and alarm delay values for each sensor type. If the sensor type is linear, the Gain and Offset val-ues are also included in this column.

• Wiring - wiring instructions and specifications.

P/N Sensor

InputDip

Switch

Voltageto

Sensor TypeTypical Settings Wiring

203-1902 Dew Point Probe Down 24 VAC (D)ewptor (L)in-ear

If set up as linear, Gain = -58.4Offset = -1523

Green to AC1White to AC2Black to odd number input (GND)Red to even number input (SIG)

Temp Probe Up N/A (T)emp Two wires to input (polarity insen-sitive)

206-0002 Light Level Down 12 VDC (L)inear Gain=175Offset=0On @ 20Off @ 30

Black to +12V on 16AI (PWR)Green to odd no. on input (GND)Yellow and red to even no. on in-put (SIG)

800-1100800-1200800-1500

Pressure Trans-ducers (Eclipse)

Down 5 VDC (1)00, (2)00, or (5)00

Alarm at 20 lbs above setpoint with 60 min delay

Red to +5V on 16AI (PWR)Black and Shield to odd no. on in-put (GND)White to even number on input (SIG)NOTE: Transducer type must be set to ECLIPSE under Transduc-er Setup.

203-5750 Relative Humid-ity

Down 12 VDC (H)um Red to +12V on 16AI (PWR)Black to odd number on input (GND)White to even number on input (SIG) marked “out” on sensorJumper N to G at sensor

Table D-1 - RMCC sensor setup

Page 136: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for
Page 137: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual I-1

Index

Numerics16AI Analog Input Board

Mounting in Enclosure 3-1Mounting Without Enclosure 3-2Overview 2-2power requirements 5-6Setup 8-41

485 Alarm PanelLocation 3-3Mounting 3-3Overview 2-5power requirements 5-6

4AO Analog Output BoardOverview 2-3power requirements 5-6

8DO Digital Output Boardpower requirements 5-6

8IO Combination Input/Output BoardBaud Rate Dip Switch Settings

4-5Limitations on Transformer Wir-

ing 5-6Mounting in Enclosure 3-1Mounting in Weather-Resistant

Enclosure 3-2Mounting Without Enclosure 3-3Network Restrictions 2-4Overview 2-4power requirements 5-6

8RO Form C Relay Output BoardBaud Rate Dip Switch Settings

4-5Mounting in Enclosure 3-1Mounting Without Enclosure 3-3Overview 2-3

8RO Relay Output BoardMounting in Enclosure 3-1Mounting Without Enclosure 3-2Overview 2-3power requirements 5-6

AAdded feature to allow for lockout of

mechanical cools when sup-ply air temperature is at or below the user-defined set-

point (screen description). 8-14

Advanced Rooftop Controller (for more see RTC)

Location 3-4Mounting in Weather Resistant

Enclosure 3-2Mounting Without Enclosures

3-3Overview 2-4

Alarm Panel. See 485 Alarm Panel.

AlarmsAcknowledged 10-5Alarm Control 10-1Archived 10-5BCU Alarms 10-4Definition of 10-4Demand Set Points 8-17Faulty Sensors 10-4Filter 8-39Notices 10-4RTC Alarms 10-2Sensor Input 10-3Unacknowledged 10-5Zone Set Points (Temperature

Hi/Lo) 8-9

Alternate Week Dates 8-24

Analog Output Setup 8-12

BBaud Rate Settings

8IO/ARTC 4-5COM A & D 4-4COM B 4-5COM C 4-5

BCU Configuration16AI Setup 8-41Board Network 8-44Board Network Status 8-44Communication Setup 8-41Configuration Menu 8-40Device Number 8-43Host Network 8-42

On-line Status 8-43Modem Setup 8-42Number of I/O Boards 8-44Reset I/O Board Network 8-45Reset Network 8-43

BCU Log On 8-3

BCU, See Building Control Unit

Building Control UnitAlarms 10-4Graphs 9-5Introduction 1-1Mounting 3-1

Operating Environment 3-1Overview 2-1Overview of Control Software

See Software Overview

Bus Amplifier. See RS232 Bus Ampli-fier.

BypassInput 8-31Output 8-36RTC 8-15Schedule 8-21

CCircuit(s), Power Setup 8-16

COM A Network. See RS485 Input/Output Network.

COM C Network. See RS232 Remote Communication Network.

COM D Network. See RS485 Input/Output Network.

Combiner 8-28

Compressor Cycle Counts (RTC) 9-2

Control Screen (Graphs) 9-5

Cooling, Description of 6-3

Copying Zone Setpoints 8-10

Curtailment, Description of 6-7, 8-18

DDaily Demand Log 9-3

Daily Demand Record 9-4

Daisy Chains, Network Layout 4-2

Date RangesGlobal 8-24Holiday 1 and 2 Dates 8-24

Daylight Savings Setup 8-37

Dead BandRelative Humidity (Inside) 8-8Temperature Control for Zones

8-7

Default Status Screens 8-2

Dehumidification 6-4, 8-8, 8-13

Dehumidification Setpoints 8-8

Demand ControlAlarm 10-3

Page 138: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

I-2 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

Alarm Set Points 8-17Alarms 6-6Circuit(s) Setup 8-16Demand Control Menu 8-16Demand Status 8-19Description of 6-5Load Shed Status 8-20Load Shedding 6-6, 8-10, 8-18,

8-20Power Status 8-19Set Points 8-16Shed Setup 8-18

HVAC RTCs 8-18Sensor Outputs 8-18

Status 8-16, 8-18

Demand Logging Interval 8-16

Demand Logs Menu 9-2Daily Demand 9-3Daily Log 9-4Hourly Log 9-3Monthly Demand 9-3Monthly Log 9-4Window Log 9-3

Demand Window Period 8-16

Devices per Network Segment 4-2

Dip Switches16AI/8IO Input Type Settings

4-6Baud Rate Settings 4-4, 4-5, 4-6Network Settings 4-4

EEconomization

Analog 8-14Description of 6-7Digital 8-9Lockout Temperature 8-9

Enclosures for I/O Boards 3-1

Environmental Control Network Components 2-1

FFilter for I/O Control 8-29

FunctionOptimum Start/Stop 8-7

GGain and Offset (Adjusment) 8-29

Global Date Ranges 8-24

GraphsControl Screen 9-5Menu 9-5View Graphs 9-5

HHand-Held Terminals (HHT) 7

CPC Suction Stepper 7Liquid Pulse 7Liquid Stepper 7Overview 2-6

Hardware Mounting485 Alarm Panel 3-3Dew Point Sensors and Control

Switches 3-6I/O Boards and Enclosures 3-1Light Level Sensors 3-6Power Monitors 3-6RS232 Bus Amplifier 3-4Temperature Sensors 3-5

Insertion Probe 3-5Inside 3-5Outside 3-5Supply and Return Air Sen-

sors 3-5Transformers 3-6

Hardware Overview 2-1485 Alarm Panel 2-5Input Communication Boards

2-216AI Board 2-2

Output Communication Boards 2-3

8RO Board 2-38RO Form C Board 2-3

Remote Communication 2-6RS232 Bus Amplifier 2-6

Special Purpose Communication Boards 2-4

8IO Board 2-4Advanced Rooftop Control-

ler (ARTC) 2-4

Heating, Description of 6-2

Hi/Lo Temperature Set Points (for Zone Alarms) 8-9

Holiday Dates Schedule 8-24

Host Network. See RS485 Host Bus Network.

Hourly Demand Log 9-3

Humidity Levels Set Points 8-8

HVACCooling 6-3Heating 6-2

Shed Set Points 8-10

II/O Boards

Board Menu 8-44Enclosures 3-1Numbers of 8-44Power Requirements 5-6Resetting the Network 8-45Snap-Track Installation 3-3Status 8-44

I/O ControlAdjustment 8-29Cell 6-11, 6-13, 6-16Combiner 8-28Control Menu 8-25Description 6-10Digital Output Module 6-14,

8-31Setup 8-32Status 8-32

Digital Output Setup 8-32Filter 8-29Input Overrides 8-31Input Set Points 8-30Input Setup 8-26Input Status 8-25Inputs 8-25kW Set Points 8-30Logic Screen 8-33Min On/Off 8-34OTMR Setup 8-34Output Bypass 8-36Output Control Menu 8-31Output Demand 8-36Output Proof 8-35Output Status 8-32Override/Bypass 6-14, 6-17,

8-36Proof 6-16, 6-17, 8-35Sensor Input Module 8-31

Setup 8-26Status 8-25

I/O Setup for RTCs 8-11

Input Set Points 8-30

Input Setup 8-26

Input Type Dip Switch Settings 4-6

Input, Sensor Logs 9-4

Input/Output ControlModule 6-11Override/Bypass 8-31Sensor Input Module 6-12

Inputs 8-25

Inside Relative Humidity Percentage, Setting 8-8

Page 139: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual I-3

Installing Hardware. See Hardware Mounting 3-1

IntroductionBCU 1-1Hardware Overview 2-1Manual 1-1Software 6-1System Setup 8-1The REFLECS Networks 4-1

JJumpers

Fail-Safe Settings on 8RO 4-5Terminating Resistance Settings

4-3, 4-5

LLED Indicator Lights 4-5

Load Shed Setup 8-18

Load Shed Status 8-20

LockoutSupply Temp Cool 8-14

Log On 8-3

Logging Interval for ARTCs 8-6

Logs and GraphsAnalog Output 9-1BCU Graphs 9-5BCU Graphs Menu 9-5Compressor Cycle Counts 9-2Control Screen 9-5Daily Demand 9-3Daily Log 9-4Demand Logs 9-2Demand Logs Menu 9-2

Daily Demand 9-3Daily Log 9-4Monthly Demand 9-3Monthly Log 9-4Window Log 9-3

Hourly Log 9-3Input and Digital Output 9-1Monthly Demand 9-3Monthly Log 9-4Overrides Log 8-21, 9-4RTC

Analog Output 9-1Compressor Cycle Counts

9-2Input and Digital Output 9-1Runtime Hours 9-2

RTC Logs 9-1RTC Menu 9-1

Runtime Hours 9-2Sensor Input Logs 9-4View Graph 9-5Window Log 9-3

MMakeup Air 6-9

Makeup Air Setup 8-14

Mechanical Cool Lockout 8-14

ModemsSetup 8-42Types Supplied 2-6

Monthly Demand Log 9-3

Monthly Demand Record 9-4

Mounting Hardware 3-1

Mounting Hardware. See also Hard-ware Mounting

NNetwork

Board 8-44Daisy Chain Diagram 4-1Dip Switches and Rotary Dials

for COMs A & D 4-4Host 8-42Leg Wire Length 4-2Segment Wire Length 4-2

New option to filter the output of the combiner cell in I/O Control (screen description). 8-29

Number of Devices per Segment 4-2

Numbering Network Devices 4-4

OOccupied/Unoccupied Fan Mode 8-6

Offset and Gain 8-29

Optimum Start/Stop Function 8-7

Output Bypass, RTC 8-15

OutputsAnalog Setup 8-12

Overrides, Schedule 8-21

PPassword Control 8-39

Passwords 8-3

Power Circuit(s) Setup 8-16

Power Interface Board (PIB) Features 2-2

Power Status (Circuits 1-4) 8-19

Processor Board Features 2-2

RREFLECS Controllers

Standard Types 2-1

REFLECS NetworksBaud Rate Dip Switch Settings

4-5Fail-Safe and Relay Dip Switch

SettingsOutput Boards 4-5

Input Type Dip Switch Settings 4-6

RS232 Remote Communication Network 4-2

Baud Rate Dip Switches 4-4Daisy Chains 4-2Devices Per Segment 4-2Leg and Segment Length

4-2Legs and Segments 4-2Network Dip Switches and

Rotary Dials 4-4Star Configurations 4-3Terminating Resistance

Jumpers 4-3RS485 Host Network 4-1RS485 Input/Output Network

4-1

REFLECS Networks 4-1

REFLECS, Definition of 2-1

Remote Communication 8-41

Remote Communication. See Ultra-Site.

ResetHost Network 8-43I/O Board Network 8-45

Rotary DialsNetwork Settings 4-4Settings for 8IO 4-5

RS232 Bus AmplifierLocation 3-4Mounting 3-4Overview 2-6

Page 140: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

I-4 026-1105 Rev 3 01-28-98

RS232 NetworkWiring 5-2

RS232 Remote Communication Net-work 4-1

I/O Board Menu 8-44Wiring 4-2

RS485 Host Bus Network 4-1wiring 4-1

RS485 Host NetworkReset Network 8-43Wiring 5-1Wiring Diagram 4-2

RS485 Input/Output Network 4-1Wiring 4-1, 5-1

RTCAlarms 10-2Analog Output Setup 8-12Baud Rate Dip Switch Settings

4-5Board Assignments 8-5Bypass 8-15Compressor Cycle Counts Log

9-2Control Methods 8-5I/O Setup 8-11Makeup Air 8-14Output Bypass 8-15Runtime Hours Log 9-2Setup 8-13Shed Setup 8-18Status 8-10Supply Temp Cool Lockout 8-14

Runtime Hours Log (RTC) 9-2

SSchedule 6-2

Alternate Week Dates 8-24Alternate Weeks 8-22Control Menu 8-20Global Dates 8-24Holiday Dates 8-24Holidays 8-22Override 8-21Standard Week 8-23

Sensor Adjustment 8-29

SensorsAlarms 10-4Dew Cell Dewpoint Probe

Location 3-6Mounting 3-6

Dewpoint Control SwitchInstallation 3-6

HumidistatsInstallation 3-6

Humidity

Installation 3-6Input Logs 9-4Inside Temperature

Location 3-5Mounting 3-5

Light LevelLocation 3-6Mounting 3-6

Outside TemperatureLocation 3-5Mounting 3-5

Return Air TemperatureLocation 3-5Mounting 3-5

Sensor Input Alarms 10-3Supply Air Temperature

Location 3-5Mounting 3-5

Supply and Return AirMounting 3-5

Wiring to 16AI or 8IO 5-2

ShedSet Points for HVAC 8-10

Shed SetupHVAC RTCs 8-18Sensor Outputs 8-18

Snap-Track Installation for I/O Boards 3-3

Software Overview 6-1Cooling 6-3Curtailment 6-7Dehumidification 6-4Demand Control 6-5

Demand Monitoring 6-6Load Shedding 6-6Predicting Energy Con-

sumption 6-6Economization 6-7Heating 6-2Input/Output Control 6-10Makeup Air 6-9Scheduling 6-2Zone Management 6-1

Space Control Methods 8-5

Special Purpose Communication Boards (8IO & ARTC) 2-4

Star Configurations, Network Layout 4-3

Status ScreensBoards 8-44Default Screens 8-2Demand 8-19Input 8-25Load Shed 8-20Output 8-32Power 8-19RTC 8-10Schedule Overrides 8-21

Summer/Winter Economization Method 8-9

Summer/Winter Zone Setpoints 8-7

Supply Temp Cool Lockout 8-14

System Configuration Guide 7-1Bypass a System Setting 7-2Check System Status Screens 7-2Define Inputs 7-1Define Outputs 7-2Define Schedules 7-1Defining Zones and HVAC Set-

points 7-1Setup Demand Monitoring 7-2

System Log On 8-2

System Setup 8-1, 8-37Control Methods 8-5Daylight Savings and Tempera-

ture Setup 8-37HVAC Control Menu 8-4Introduction 8-1Passwords 8-39Winter/Summer Dates 8-38

TTemperature Supply Cool Lockout

8-14

Temperature Units, Setting 8-37

Terminating Resistance Jumpers 4-3

TransformersWiring Six Board 5-6Wiring Ten Board 5-7Wiring Three Board 5-6

UUltraSite Overview 2-6

VView Graph 9-5

WWeek Dates

Alternate 8-24

Weekly Schedule 8-23

Page 141: Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual Solutions/026-1105Rev3.pdf · Building Control Unit (BCU) Installation and Operation Manual TM ... Shed Set Points for

BCU I&O Manual I-5

Window Demand Log 9-3

WiringCOM A and D 5-1COM B 5-1COM C 5-2Daisy Chains 4-2Devices per Segment 4-2Legs and Segments 4-2Power Connections 5-6

Power Requirements 5-6Transformers 5-6

Power Requirements for I/O Boards 5-6

Sensors and Transducers 5-2Specifications 5-1Star Configurations 4-3Transformers 5-6Wire Lengths 4-2

ZZone Management 6-1

Alarm Set Points 8-9Copying Set Points 8-10Schedules 6-2, 8-6Set Points

Dead Band 8-7Delays 8-7Lockout 8-8Summer/Winter 8-7

Setpoints 6-2Status 6-2, 8-4Temperature Setpoints 8-7

Zone Schedule Setup 8-6

Zone Status 8-4